E
U
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTROLS,
INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS
CONTROLS,
INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS
BASIC SYSTEM
CONNECTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
BASIC SYSTEM
CONNECTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
POWER SUPPLY
PREPARATIONS
POWER SUPPLY
PREPARATIONS
DV CAMCORDER
DV CAMKORDER
CAMESCOPE DV
SETTING AND
ADJUSTMENTS
BEFORE SHOOTING
SETTING AND
ADJUSTMENTS
BEFORE SHOOTING
CÁMARA DE VÍDEO DIGITAL
VIDEOCAMERA DIGITALE
SHOOTING
OPERATION
SHOOTING
OPERATION
DV CAMCORDER
PLAYBACK MODE
PLAYBACK MODE
INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
GY-DV5100BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
USING EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS
USING EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS
GY-DV5100
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
TIME CODE
OPERATION
TIME CODE
OPERATION
GY-DV5101
INSTRUCCIONES
ISTRUZIONI
MENU SCREENS
MENU SCREENS
FEATURES OF THE
CAMERA SECTION
FEATURES OF THE
CAMERA SECTION
OTHERS
OTHERS
* The illustration shows the GY-DV5100 DV Camcorder with the optional lens, viewfinder and Microphone attached.
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating
this unit, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the
best possible performance.
* The illustration shows the GY-DV5100/GY-DV5101 DV Camcorder with the optional lens, viewfinder and Microphone attached.
For Customer Use :
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating
this unit, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the
best possible performance.
This instruction manual is made from 100% recycled paper.
This instruction manual is made from 100% recycled paper.
LWT0230-001A
Model No. GY-DV5100
Serial No.
LWT0231-001A
E
U
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
FOR USA AND CANADA
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TO REDUCETHE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSETHIS APPLIANCETO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
AUTION :
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT use
any other power source.
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
NOTE:
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT
use any other power source.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the top frame.
CAUTION
NOTE:
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user servicea-
ble parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the top frame.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
CAUTION
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user service-
able parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
AVERTISSEMENT :
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER
L’APPAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.
Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du courant
direct en 12V.
INFORMATION FOR USA
INFORMATION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmfull interfrence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
ATTENTION :
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’électrocution,
ne pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation électrique.
REMARQUE :
La plaque d’identification (numéro de série) se trouve sur le panneau
arrière de l’appareil.
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
CONDITIONS : (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
3
E-3
E
U
Thank you for purchasing the DV Camcorder GY-DV5100.
These instructions are for GY-DV5100U.
●
●
This unit records and plays back in the SP mode.
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.
Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we
recommend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3
minutes from the beginning of the tape.
Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform
a test recording and confirm that both video and audio
are recorded correctly.
Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright holders.
JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or
audio due to malfunction of the camcorder or the
videocassette.
This unit is a DV video system format camcorder.
Videocassettes marked with the symbol or
can be used.
●
●
This unit records and plays back in the SP mode.
symbol
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.
Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we
recommend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3
minutes from the beginning of the tape.
Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform
a test recording and confirm that both video and audio
are recorded correctly.
Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright holders.
JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or
audio due to malfunction of the camcorder or the
videocassette.
This unit is a DV video system format camcorder.
Videocassettes marked with the
can be used.
symbol or
symbol
●
The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded
on other units (including another GY-DV5100) are recorded
or played back on this camcorder.
●
●
●
The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded
on other units (including another GY-DV5100) are recorded
or played back on this camcorder.
●
The transient section between scenes recorded on other
units and those recorded on this unit may appear
disturbed.
●
●
●
The transient section between scenes recorded on other
units and those recorded on this unit may appear
disturbed.
●
Digital noise may appear during playback due to tracking
errors.
●
Digital noise may appear during playback due to tracking
errors.
MAIN FEATURES
MAIN FEATURES
●
Built-in compatible mechanism for use of both standard-size
DV videocassettes and mini-size DV videocassettes
Recording/playback can be made to/from Standard DV, Mini
DV and DVCAM cassettes in DV format.
Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played
back (simple playback). Recording in the DVCAM format is
not possible.
●
●
●
LOLUX for 0.2 lx (F1.4) illumination
●
Built-in compatible mechanism for use of both standard-size
DV videocassettes and mini-size DV videocassettes
Recording/playback can be made to/from Standard DV, Mini
DV and DVCAM cassettes in DV format.
Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played
back (simple playback). Recording in the DVCAM format is
not possible.
●
●
●
LOLUX for 0.2 lx (F1.4) illumination
Employment of LOLUX mode ensures +36 dB gain. This is
ideal for difficult shooting conditions with almost no
illumination.
Employment of LOLUX mode ensures +36 dB gain. This is
ideal for difficult shooting conditions with almost no illumina-
tion.
The gain up value can be selected in the menu.
The gain up value can be selected in the menu.
Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit
Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris
position even in back light conditions or when a bright subject
moves in a frame. Switch provided for selecting over or under
level.
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris
position even in back light conditions or when a bright subject
moves in a frame.Switch provided for selecting over or under
level.
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
●
Compact, lightweight design
●
Compact, lightweight design
Employment of aluminum die-casting has resulted in an
operating condition weight as low as 5.6 kg including lens,
viewfinder, battery, and cassette.
Employment of aluminum die-casting has resulted in an
operating condition weight as low as approximately 5.6 kg
including lens, viewfinder, battery, and cassette.
Safety Zone indication in viewfinder
Two types of safety zone indicator functions provided.
Safety Zone indication in viewfinder
Two types of safety zone indicator functions provided.
●
●
●
●
DV high-quality digital format
The 4:1:1, 8-bit, 25 Mbps component digital processing
ensures recording and playback with high picture quality.
●
●
●
●
DV high-quality digital format
The 4:2:0, 8-bit, 25 Mbps component digital processing
ensures recording and playback with high picture quality.
●
●
Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder
●
●
Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder
Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function
Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function
Eliminating the need for troublesome switch or filter
operations, the FAS function automatically provides a wide
range of compatibility with shooting conditions which varies
as you move between indoors and outdoors or between bright
and dark locations.
Eliminating the need for troublesome switch or filter
operations, the FAS function automatically provides a wide
range of compatibility with shooting conditions which varies
as you move between indoors and outdoors or between bright
and dark locations.
High sound quality based on PCM audio
Select of sampling, 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling or 12-bit, 32 kHz
sampling. Ensures high-quality digital audio.
High sound quality based on PCM audio
Select of sampling, 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling or 12-bit, 32 kHz
sampling, ensure high-quality digital audio.
Time code reader/generator
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to record
SMPTE time code and user’s bits.
Time code reader/generator
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to record
EBU time code and user’s bits.
●
●
Color temperature conversion filters for 3200K, 5600K, 5600K
+ 1/8ND, 5600 + 1/64ND provided.
●
●
Colour temperature conversion filters for 3200K, 5600K,
5600K + 1/8ND, 5600 + 1/64ND provided.
Built-in 2.5" color LCD display
Built-in 2.5" colour LCD display
Variable scan shutter
Variable scan shutter
In addition to displaying the camera image and the playback
image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens, menu
screens for settings, and alarm indications.
In addition to displaying the camera image and the playback
image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens, menu
screens for settings, and alarm indications.
Eliminates flicker when shooting other screen pictures than
NTSC, such as computer monitor screens.
Copes with the range from 60.1 Hz to 2084.6 Hz.
Eliminates flicker when shooting other screen pictures than
PAL, such as computer monitor screens.
Copes with the range from 50.1 Hz to 2067.8 Hz.
●
Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking
●
Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking
●
DV (i. LINK) connector
●
DV (i. LINK) connector
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback mode.
The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an abnormal
condition occurs in the unit.
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback mode.
The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an abnormal
condition occurs in the unit.
DV connector (4-pin) provided. Enables transfer of digital data
to other equipment provided with DV connector, such as a
non-linear editing system.
DV connector (4-pin) provided.Enables transfer of digital data
to other equipment provided with DV connector, such as a
non-linear editing system.
●
●
1/2" bayonet type lens
●
●
1/2" bayonet type lens
●
●
Recording check function for convenient recording review and
edit search function.
●
●
Recording check function for convenient recording review and
edit search function.
Camera output, VCR playback output (composite/YC)
possible
Camera output, VCR playback output (composite/YC)
possible
Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high-quality
picture
1/2" 3-CCD with 380,000 effective pixels employed. Digital
signal processing for reproduction of DV high-quality picture.
Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high-quality
picture
1/2" 3-CCD with 440,000 effective pixels employed. Digital
signal processing for reproduction of DV high-quality picture.
●
●
Built-in color bar (SMPTE type)
●
●
Built-in colour bar (EBU type)
Superior operability with shutter speed and menus selected
by dial.
Superior operability with shutter speed and menus selected
by dial.
4
E-4
E
U
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7-1 Basic Recording Operation ...................................... 54
7-2 Searching for Recorded Scenes (Edit Search) ........ 56
7-3 If the Record-Standby Mode Continues ................... 57
7-4 Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby
Mode (Recording Check Function) .......................... 57
7-5 HEADER REC Function ........................................... 58
7-6 Recording the Colour Bars ....................................... 60
7-1 Basic Recording Operation ...................................... 54
7-2 Searching for Recorded Scenes (Edit Search) ........ 56
7-3 If the Record-Standby Mode Continues ................... 57
7-4 Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby
Mode (Recording Check Function) .......................... 57
7-5 HEADER REC Function ........................................... 58
7-6 Recording the Color Bars ......................................... 60
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
MAIN FEATURES ............................................................... 4
CONTENTS ........................................................................ 5
MAIN FEATURES ............................................................... 4
1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1-1 Precautions for Proper Use ........................................ 6
1-2 Routine and Periodical Maintenance ......................... 7
1-3 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape .............. 7
1-4 Videocassette to be Used .......................................... 8
1-5 Battery Pack to be Used ............................................ 8
1-6 Condensation ............................................................. 9
1-7 Characteristic CCD Phenomena ................................ 9
1-1 Precautions for Proper Use ........................................ 6
1-2 Routine and Periodical Maintenance ......................... 7
1-3 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape .............. 7
1-4 Videocassette to be Used .......................................... 8
1-5 Battery Pack to be Used ............................................ 8
1-6 Condensation ............................................................. 9
1-7 Characteristic CCD Phenomena ................................ 9
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8-1 Playback Procedure ................................................. 61
8-2 Fast-Forward, Rewind .............................................. 62
8-3 Search ...................................................................... 62
8-4 Blank Search ............................................................ 62
8-5 Variable Slow Playback ............................................ 63
8-6 Outputting CH-3, CH-4 Channel Audio .................... 64
8-1 Playback Procedure ................................................. 61
8-2 Fast-Forward, Rewind .............................................. 62
8-3 Search ...................................................................... 62
8-4 Blank Search ............................................................ 62
8-5 Variable Slow Playback ............................................ 63
8-6 Outputting CH-3, CH-4 Channel Audio .................... 64
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-1 Front Section ............................................................ 10
2-2 Right Side Section.................................................... 12
2-3 Left Side Section ...................................................... 17
2-4 Top Section .............................................................. 18
2-5 Rear Section ............................................................ 19
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in
the Viewfinder .......................................................... 21
2-7 Lens (Optional)......................................................... 29
2-8 1.5-Inch Viewfinder (Optional).................................. 30
2-1 Front Section ............................................................ 10
2-2 Right Side Section.................................................... 12
2-3 Left Side Section ...................................................... 17
2-4 Top Section .............................................................. 18
2-5 Rear Section ............................................................ 19
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in
the Viewfinder .......................................................... 21
2-7 ZOOM Lens (Optional) ............................................. 29
2-8 1.5-Inch Viewfinder (Optional).................................. 30
APPLICATION
APPLICATION
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with
DV Connector .......................................................... 65
DV Connector .......................................................... 65
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10-1 Displaying Time Code .............................................. 67
10-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code .................. 68
10-3 Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time
Codes Recorded on Tape ........................................ 70
10-4 Reproducing Time Codes......................................... 70
10-1 Displaying Time Code .............................................. 67
10-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code .................. 68
10-3 Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time
Codes Recorded on Tape ........................................ 70
10-4 Reproducing Time Codes......................................... 70
PREPARATIONS
PREPARATIONS
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
3-1 Basic System ........................................................... 31
3-2 Attaching the Zoom Lens ......................................... 32
3-3 Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................... 32
3-4 Attaching the Microphone (Provided)....................... 33
3-5 Attaching the Microphone (Optional)........................ 33
3-6 Attaching the Tripod Base (Provided) ...................... 34
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
3-1 Basic System ........................................................... 31
3-2 Attaching the Zoom Lens ......................................... 32
3-3 Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................... 32
3-4 Attaching the Microphone (Provided) ....................... 33
3-5 Attaching the Microphone (Optional)........................ 33
3-6 Attaching the Tripod Base (Provided) ...................... 34
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-1 Menu Screen Configuration ..................................... 71
11-2 Setting Menu Screens .............................................. 72
11-3 FILE MANAGE Menu Screen................................... 73
11-4 TOP MENU Screen .................................................. 74
11-5 CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen...................... 75
11-6 CAMERA PROCESS MENU Screen ....................... 76
11-7 ADVANCED PROCESS Screen .............................. 78
11-8 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Screen ............................... 79
11-9 AUDIO Menu Screen ............................................... 79
11-10 LCD/VF Menu Screen .............................................. 81
11-11 TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen................................... 83
11-12 HEADER REC Menu Screen ................................... 84
11-13 TIME/DATE Menu Screen ........................................ 85
11-14 OTHERS Menu Screen ............................................ 86
11-1 Menu Screen Configuration ..................................... 71
11-2 Setting Menu Screens .............................................. 72
11-3 FILE MANAGE Menu Screen................................... 73
11-4 TOP MENU Screen .................................................. 74
11-5 CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen...................... 75
11-6 CAMERA PROCESS MENU Screen ....................... 76
11-7 ADVANCED PROCESS Screen .............................. 78
11-8 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Screen ............................... 79
11-9 AUDIO/VIDEO Menu Screen ................................... 79
11-10 LCD/VF Menu Screen .............................................. 81
11-11 TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen................................... 83
11-12 HEADER REC Menu Screen ................................... 84
11-13 TIME/DATE Menu Screen ........................................ 85
11-14 OTHERS Menu Screen ............................................ 86
4. POWER SUPPLY
4-1 AC Operation ........................................................... 35
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional) ........................... 35
4. POWER SUPPLY
4-1 AC Operation ........................................................... 35
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional) ........................... 35
BASIC OPERATIONS
BASIC OPERATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5-1 Turning the Power ON ............................................. 39
5-2 Cassette Loading and Unloading ............................. 40
5-3 Viewing the LCD Monitor ......................................... 42
5-4 Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date
and Time .................................................................. 43
5-5 Charging the Built-in Battery .................................... 46
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
5-1 Turning the Power ON ............................................. 39
5-2 Cassette Loading and Unloading ............................. 40
5-3 Viewing the LCD Monitor ......................................... 42
5-4 Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date
and Time .................................................................. 43
5-5 Charging the Built-in Battery .................................... 46
12-1 Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW) ....................... 88
12-2 IRIS (Brightness) Adjustment ................................... 89
12-3 Adjusting the Shutter Speed .................................... 90
12-4 Shooting the Screen Image on a Computer
Monitor ..................................................................... 91
12-5 Gain (Sensitivity) Adjustment ................................... 92
12-6 Switch Setup According to Illumination
12-1 Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW) ....................... 88
12-2 IRIS (Brightness) Adjustment ................................... 89
12-3 Adjusting the Shutter Speed .................................... 90
12-4 Shooting the Screen Image on a Computer
Monitor ..................................................................... 91
12-5 Gain (Sensitivity) Adjustment ................................... 92
12-6 Switch Setup According to Illumination
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE
SHOOTING
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE
SHOOTING
and Subject .............................................................. 93
12-7 How to Use Skin Detail ............................................ 94
and Subject .............................................................. 93
12-7 How to Use Skin Detail ............................................ 94
6-1 Camera Settings ...................................................... 47
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/LETTER/SQUEEZE) Mode Selection..... 47
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment ............................................. 48
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment .................................... 48
6-5 Back Focus Adjustment............................................ 49
6-6 White Balance Adjustment ....................................... 50
6-7 Audio Input Signal Selection .................................... 51
6-8 Recording Level Adjustment .................................... 52
6-9 Monitoring Audio during Recording .......................... 53
6-1 Camera Settings ...................................................... 47
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/LETTER) Mode Selection ............. 47
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment.............................................. 48
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment .................................... 48
6-5 Back Focus Adjustment............................................ 49
6-6 White Balance Adjustment ....................................... 50
6-7 Audio Input Signal Selection .................................... 51
6-8 Recording Level Adjustment .................................... 52
6-9 Monitoring Audio during Recording .......................... 53
OTHERS
OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13-1 Alarm Indications and Actions .................................. 96
13-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................... 99
13-3 Hour Meter Display ................................................ 100
13-4 Specifications ......................................................... 101
13-1 Alarm Indications and Actions .................................. 96
13-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................... 99
13-3 Hour Meter Display ................................................ 100
13-4 Specifications ......................................................... 101
5
E-5
E
U
1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1-1 Precautions for Proper Use
1-1 Precautions for Proper Use
● Supply voltage
● Precautions for transportation
Do not drop or hit the unit against a hard object.
● Supply voltage
● Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover
when the unit is not to be used for a long period.
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and increased
noise may occur. Do not exceed 15 V DC in any case, or the
unit could be damaged.
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If
the power voltage is too low, abnormal colour and increased
noise may occur. Do not exceed 15 V DC in any case, or the
unit could be damaged.
● Remove the videocassette before transporting the unit.
● Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the power
cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the tape may
be damaged.
● Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover
when the unit is not to be used for a long period.
● Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use the unit within the allowable temperature range
of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to 80%. Using
the unit at a temperature or humidity outside the allowable
ranges could result not only in malfunction but the impact on
the CCD elements could be serious as small white spots
may be generated.
● Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use the unit within the allowable temperature range
of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to 80%. Using
the unit at a temperature or humidity outside the allowable
ranges could result not only in malfunction but the impact on
the CCD elements could be serious as small white spots
may be generated.
● The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set lower
than the reference input (–60 dBs) setting.
● Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the power
cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the tape may
be damaged.
● When the unit is not in use, be sure to set the POWER switch
to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.
● The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set lower
than the reference input (- 60 dBs) setting.
● Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. When it
is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in a solution of neutral
detergent, wipe the body with it, and then use a clean cloth
to remove the detergent.To prevent deformation of the body,
etc. and to avoid operation hazards, do not allow volatile
liquids such as benzine and thinner to touch the body, and
do not wipe it with a cloth soaked in such a liquid.
● When the unit is not in use, be sure to set the POWER switch
to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.
● Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or
television transmitting antenna, in places where strong
magnetic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc.,
or near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers
or cellular phones.
● Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colours
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or
television transmitting antenna, in places where strong
magnetic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc.,
or near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers
or cellular phones.
● Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. When it
is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in a solution of neutral
detergent, wipe the body with it, and then use a clean cloth
to remove the detergent. To prevent deformation of the body,
etc. and to avoid operation hazards, do not allow volatile
liquids such as benzine and thinner to touch the body, and
do not wipe it with a cloth soaked in such a liquid.
● The camera may not show stable pictures in the period
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a
malfunction.
● Use of wireless microphone near the camera
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner
is used near the camera during recording, the tuner could
pick up noise.
● Use of wireless microphone near the camera
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner
is used near the camera during recording, the tuner could
pick up noise.
● If a tape containing recorded NTSC signals is played back,
“NTSC INHIBIT” is displayed and correct playback will not
take place. If this happens, remove the videocassette so that
the unit returns to its normal state.
● The camera may not show stable pictures in the period
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a
malfunction.
● Avoid using or placing the unit in places;
• subject to extreme heat or cold;
• with excessive dirt or dust;
● Avoid using or placing the unit in places;
• subject to extreme heat or cold;
• with excessive dirt or dust;
● If a tape containing recorded PAL signals is played back,
“PAL INHIBIT” is displayed and correct playback will not take
place. If this happens, remove the videocassette so that the
unit returns to its normal state.
● When turning on the power with the tape inserted or after
loading a tape, the built-in head cleaner will emit a sound
while operating.However, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
• with high humidity or moisture;
• with high humidity or moisture;
• subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking stove;
• subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface.
• also do not leave the unit for long hours in a parked car
under direct sunlight or near room heating equipment.
• subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking stove;
• subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface.
• also do not leave the unit for long hours in a parked car
under direct sunlight or near room heating equipment.
● The LCD screen and the viewfinder screen are manufactured
using high-precision technology. Black spots may appear on
the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen, or red, blue, green
and/or white spots may not turn off. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on the tape.
● When turning on the power with the tape inserted or after
loading a tape, the built-in head cleaner will emit a sound
while operating. However, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
● Do not leave the unit where it is subject to radiation or x-
rays or where corrosive gasses occur.
● Do not leave the unit where it is subject to radiation or x-
rays or where corrosive gasses occur.
● The LCD screen and the viewfinder screen are manufactured
using high-precision technology. Black spots may appear on
the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen, or red, blue, green
and/or white spots may not turn off. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on the tape.
● Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or damage
to the mechanism.
● Protect the unit from being splashed with water
(especially when shooting in the rain).
● Protect the unit from being splashed with water
(especially when shooting in the rain).
● Protect the unit from being wet when shooting on a beach.
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.
Be sure to clean the camera after use.
● Protect the unit from being wet when shooting on a beach.
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.
Be sure to clean the camera after use.
● Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or damage
to the mechanism.
CAUTION
● Protect the unit against penetration of dust when using it in a
place subject to sandy dust.
● Protect the unit against penetration of dust when using it in a
place subject to sandy dust.
● Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or
other strong light source.
• Eye damage could result.
• If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays
may collect inside the unit and cause damage or a fire.
● When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in
damage.
● Setup level
● Optical performance of lens
CAUTION :
The video signal of the unit’s video output is provided with a
setup level when shipped from the factory. If you want to turn
OFF the setup level, set the SET UP item on the AUDIO/
VIDEO menu screen to 0.0%.
Due to the optical performance of the lens, colour divergence
phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration) may occur
at the periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
● Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or
other strong light source.
• Eye damage could result.
• If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays
may collect inside the unit and cause damage or a fire.
● When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in
damage.
● Optical performance of lens
● Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching between
the playback picture and the EE picture.
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color divergence
phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration) may occur
at the periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
● Use the unit in an upright position.
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deteriorate,
adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.
● Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching between
the playback picture and the EE picture.
● Vibrations
● Use the unit in an upright position.
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound may
be disturbed during VTR playback in locations subjected to
strong vibrations.
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deteriorate,
adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.
● Precautions for transportation
● Vibrations
Do not drop or hit the unit against a hard object.
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound may
be disturbed during VTR playback in locations subjected to
strong vibrations.
● Remove the videocassette before transporting the unit.
6
E-6
1. INTRODUCTION
1-2 Routine and Periodical Maintenance
The GY-DV5100 incorporates precision mechanical parts, which will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as the unit is used. After
the unit has been used for a long period even in a normal environment, the heads, drums and tape transport mechanisms also
collect dirt. Especially, dust which penetrates the inside of the VCR section during outdoor use will promote the wear and deterioration
of mechanical parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to maintain the video and audio quality at high
levels. To prevent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical parts using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance. However,
cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not enough for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism, so it is also recommended
to apply periodical maintenance (inspection) to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure. As the replacement, adjustment and
servicing of parts require advanced skill and equipment, please consult the person in charge of professional video equipment at
your nearest JVC-authorized service agent.
Head Cleaning
Periodical Maintenance
Contents : Check or replace the following mechanical parts
according to the running time.
● To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically. (Read the
“Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”.) If head
cleaning is not performed periodically, a type of mosaic noise
called block noise may appear in the picture or sound may
be interrupted.
Running Time
500H 1000 H 1500H 2000H 4000H
Drum ass’y (including heads)
Head cleaner
Tape guides & rollers
Reel disc and tension bands
⅜
ଁ
⅜
–
⅜
ⅷ
ଁ
ଁ
⅜
ଁ
ଁ
–
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
–: Check
⅜: Clean, check and adjust.
ଁ: Clean and check. Replace as required.
ⅷ: Replace.
• The maintenance contents vary depending on the operating
environment and method. Therefore, the above data should
be considered as a reference.
Block Noise
● Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC. Do not use head
cleaning tapes other than specified. Read the precautions
and instructions for use of the head cleaning tape.
Time management
The accumulated running time of the unit can be confirmed
with the hour meter display (which shows the accumulated drum
running time). For details, see “HOUR METER DISPLAY” on
page 100.
● When dust adheres to the heads, the warning message
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is displayed on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder during playback, edit search,
and recording check using the RET button on the lens section.
For consultations related to the maintenance planning or
cost, please contact the person in charge of professional
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service
agent.
1-3 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape
Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC.
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head
cleaning tape.
Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment, head cleaning
should be conducted at intervals half of those given in
the below chart.
Note 2) If an ME80 tape is used immediately after head cleaning,
the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” indicator may
remain on. In this case, let the tape run as the indicator
will turn off after the tape has run for a while.
Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature (10˚C to
35˚C).
Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for use of
the cleaning tape. However, some of these instructions
differ from the contents of this sheet. When using the
cleaning tape, please follow the instructions of this sheet.
Note 5) If the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” does not
disappear after repeated head cleanings, the recording
tape may be abnormal. Avoid excessive repeated use of
the head cleaning tape.
1. Insert the cleaning tape. Press the PLAY button after the
cleaning tape is fully loaded. The tape runs for 10 seconds
at a time in the PLAY mode. (The tape stops automatically
and then the unit enters the STOP MODE.)
2. Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for
each cleaning.
■ Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head
cleaning.
Operating
environment
Low temperature
0˚C to 10˚C
Room temperature
10˚C to 35˚C
High temperature
35˚C to 40˚C
Yardstick for use
of cleaning tape
1 to 2 times
every 5 hours
1 to 2 times
every 20 to 30 hours every 5 hours
1 to 2 times
7
E
U
1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1-4 Videocassette to be Used
1-4 Videocassette to be Used
● Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the “
” symbol.
Standard DV videocassette: LA-DV276, LA-DV186, LA-
DV124
Mini DV videocassette: M-DV63PRO, M-DV60, M-DV30
* Do not use M-DV80.
” or
● Videocassette tapes with the “
are provided with a switch on the back to prevent
accidental erasure.
● Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording
in the tape from being overwritten.
● To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.
” or “
” symbol
● Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the “
” symbol.
Standard DV videocassette: LA-DV276, LA-DV186, LA-
DV124
Mini DV videocassette: M-DV63PRO, M-DV60, M-DV30
* Do not use M-DV80.
” or
● Videocassette tapes with the “
are provided with a switch on the back to prevent
accidental erasure.
● Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording
in the tape from being overwritten.
” or “
” symbol
“
“
● To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.
● Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.
● Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being
completely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind
it to the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.
● Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and good
ventilation where mould does not form.
● Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.
● Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being
completely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind
it to the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.
● Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and good
ventilation where mould does not form.
Switch
Switch
REC
REC
SAVE
SAVE
● After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly,
it becomes unable to maintain full performance due to
an increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not
continue to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will
reduce the rotary head life.
● After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly,
it becomes unable to maintain full performance due to
an increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not
continue to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will
reduce the rotary head life.
■For recording and storing videotapes in the best condition
■For recording and storing videotapes in the best condition
Observe the following instructions for the best recording and
storage of videotapes.
● Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period.
Observe the following instructions for the best recording and
storage of videotapes.
● Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period.
If videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may
result in distortion of the tape. Also it may cause tape-to-tape
adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended that vid-
eotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year for refresh-
ing.
If videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may
result in distortion of the tape.Also it may cause tape-to-tape
adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended that
videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year for
refreshing.
● Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes.
It is recommended that you record and store videotapes in
the environment below.
● Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes.
It is recommended that you record and store videotapes in
the environment below.
Storage
Storage
● When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on end.
Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust and
ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store them
lying flat. When housed in a horizontal position, pressure from
other tapes can cause distortions and deformations of the
tape edges.
● When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on end.
Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust and
ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store them
lying flat.When housed in a horizontal position, pressure from
other tapes can cause distortions and deformations of the
tape edges.
Recording
Short period Long period
(Up to 10 years) (Over 10 years)
Recording
Short period Long period
(Up to 10 years) (Over 10 years)
Temperature
Humidity
17°C to 25°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C
30% to 70% 40% to 55% 25% to 35%
Temperature
Humidity
17°C to 25°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C
30% to 70% 40% to 55% 25% to 35%
Hourly temperature change Less than 10°C
Hourly humidity change Less than 10%
–
–
–
–
Hourly temperature change Less than 10°C
Hourly humidity change Less than 10%
–
–
–
–
1-5 Battery Pack to be Used
1-5 Battery Pack to be Used
The GY-DV5100 can use any of the following battery packs.
*
A flat shape type battery pack cannot be connected directly
to the camera. It is necessary to mount the optional battery
case.
The GY-DV5100 can use any of the following battery packs.
*
An Anton-Bauer battery pack cannot be connected directly
to the camera.It is necessary to mount the optional battery
holder.
●
Flat shape type
●
Flat shape type
●
Anton-Bauer battery pack: DIONIC 90
●
Anton-Bauer battery pack: DIONIC 90
Trimpack 13/14 Series
●
Battery case: SCV2978-002
See “Attaching the NP-1B type Battery” on page 36.
Trimpack 13/14 Series
●
Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QR JVC DIGI
For details on how to mount the battery holder, see page
37.
Magnum 13/14 Series
Compack 13/14 Series
Propack 13/14 Series
Magnum 13/14 Series
Compack 13/14 Series
Propack 13/14 Series
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the
BATTERY TYPE item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen
and BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu
screen according to the type of the battery pack in use.
☞See “BATTERY TYPE” on page 87.
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the
BATTERY TYPE item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen
and BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen
according to the type of the battery pack in use.
☞ See “BATTERY TYPE” on page 87.
☞See “BATTERY INFO” on page 82.
☞ See “BATTERY INFO” on page 82.
8
E-8
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
1. INTRODUCTION
1-6 Condensation
2-1 Front Section
●
●
If the unit has been cooled down in a cold place and is then
carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in the warm
air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides and be cooled
into water droplets. This phenomenon is referred to as
condensation (dewing). When this occurs, the head drum and
tape guides are covered with droplets allowing the tape to be
stuck to them, leading to tape damage.
●
“CONDENSATION ON DRUM” is displayed on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs in
this unit.
[LENS] Lens control connector
Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens here.
4
Pin No.
Function
Pin No.
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
Return switch
VTR trigger
7
8
Iris position
IRIS A/R INPUT
EXTENDER position
ZOOM position
—
q
w
WARNING 0201
CONDENSATION ON DRUM
GND
9
Condensation occurs in the following cases:
Lens AUTO/MANU control
IRIS control
10
11
12
•
When the unit is suddenly moved
from a cold place to a warm place.
When a room heater has just started
or when the unit is exposed directly
to cold air from an air conditioner.
When the unit is placed in a very
humid place.
Head drum
!
o
VF
+12V DC
—
•
[ZEBRA] Switch
5
When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is imposed on the
viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in
accordance with the menu settings made for the video
signal. This pattern can be used as a reference for manual
adjustment of the lens iris. Zebra patterns are also displayed
during color bar display when this switch is set to ON.
☞ See “Zebra Pattern Display during ManualAdjustment”
on page 89.
Keep the power on until the warning message disappears.
•
Video tape
●
Pay attention to condensation even before the condensation
indication appears.
Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the
camera under conditions where the temperature
environment changes.
After moving the unit, do not use until the internal parts
have stabilized.
•
As condensation forms gradually, the condensation
indication may not appear for the first 10-15 minutes after
condensation has formed inside.
OFF ZEBRA
•
In an extremely cold place, the condensation could freeze
and turn into frost. In such a case, it takes an additional 2-
3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and
then to be dissolved.
e
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
ON
WHITE
ACCU
FOCUS
● The default value is 70% - 80%. The luminance level can
be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD/VF menu
screen.
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
r
t
y
i
u
●
To prevent condensation when moving the unit from one place
to another where the temperatures are greatly defferent, first
remove the videocassette, place the unit in a tightly sealed
vinyl bag, and then move it to a new environment.
☞ See “ZEBRA” item on page 81.
While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the
color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST
item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in
the viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position when
released.
☞ See “How to Use Skin Detail” on page 94.
● The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while
the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.
Viewfinder mount base, sliding securing ring
Mount the viewfinder on the base and secure it using the
sliding securing ring.
1
To ensure no condensation occurs, allow the temperature of
the unit in the bag to reach that of the new environment before
using it.
☞ See “Attaching the Viewfinder” on page 32.
[VF] Viewfinder connector (6-pin)
Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.
2
3
[FRONT MIC IN] Front microphone input
[VTR]VTR trigger button (record start/stop button)
1-7 Characteristic CCD Phenomena
6
7
connector (XLR 3-pin)
Balanced 3-pin connector for camera microphone.
● Set the FRONT MIC +48V switch
accordance with the connected device.
● To record the audio from this connector, set the CH-1/
Recording start/stop can be done with this button.
(It is interlocked with the VTR trigger button on the side
section and the VTR trigger button on the lens section.)
on page 16 in
!
Smear and Blooming
Moire or Aliasing
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect or
a banding in fine mesh patterns.
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce
vertical streaking (called “smear“) when shooting an extremely
bright light source.Another effect is the expansion of light around
a bright light or object (called “blooming“).
[AUDIO LEVEL CH-1] CH-1 audio level control
CH-2 AUDIO IN switch
on page 16 to “FRONT”.
0
Adjusts the audio level of the CH-1 audio signal input.
Normally, the camera is used with the control set to the
maximum (10) position.
● To use this control, set the CH1 FRONT VR item on the
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen to “ENABLE”.
☞ See page 16.
White dots
The CCD employed in this unit is characterized by inducing
very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please take note
that smear or blooming may be indured when shooting a bright
light source.
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce
the effect of white dots in the image. This condition is
conspicuous especially when gain is applied.
Pin No.
Function
GND
☞ See “AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen” on page 79 .
1
3
2
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).
As far as possible, use the unit under conditions where the
temperature of the unit does not increase.
1
2
3
Smear
HOT
(Vertical pale streaking
appearing at high
luminous object)
COLD
High luminous object
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)
CAUTION:
The provided microphone is a phantom microphone. Please
confirm that the FRONT MIC +48V switch is set to the “ON”
side when the provided microphone should be used.
Blooming
(Blurring in highlight)
Monitor screen
When using
a
microphone other than
a
phantom
microphone, first set the FRONT MIC +48V switch to “OFF”
before connecting the microphone.
9
10
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-2 Right Side Section
[Camera Setting Section]
[AUTO WHITE/ACCU FOCUS] switch
White Balance:
8
● First, position a white object to occupy 80% of the centre
of the screen.
● When the WHT.BAL switch on page 14 is set toAor B,
%
setting this switch to the upper position (“AUTO WHITE”)
will provide automatic adjustment for white balance.
q
*
It is not activated in preset, full auto shooting, full-time
auto white balance and color bar modes.
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
w
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
☞ See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 50.
ACCU-FOCUS:
● When this switch is pressed down to “ACCU FOCUS”,
the lens iris will be forced to open for approximately ten
seconds.
e
r
SHUTTER
MENU
AUDIO
LEVE
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
L
t
CAM
● The depth of field can be reduced and the lens focusing
can be adjusted more accurately.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
CAUTION:
•
As the automatic shutter is activated up to 1/1920,
flicker may appear on the screen depending on the
lighting conditions (such as a fluorescent lamp, etc.)
This operation is not effected in the LOLUX mode.
•
!
!
y
u
i o
!
Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever
Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlockwise
to release lens.
To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.
☞ See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 32.
9
0
3
1
2
[STATUS] Status/Menu button
[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control
Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and
earphone.
● Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condition
in which the menu screen is not shown) displays a status
screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor. The
displayed status screen changes each time the button is
pressed.
[FILTER] Color temperature conversion filter
control knob
[EDIT SEARCH +/–] +/– button for edit search
This knob switches the internal color temperature filters.
(3200K, 5600K + 1/8ND, 5600K, 5600K + 1/64ND)
☞ See “Camera Settings” on page 47.
Pressing this button in the record-standby mode plays back
the tape while the button is being pressed.
● While the + button is pressed, playback takes place at
the normal speed. When the button is released, the
standby mode is reengaged at the point where the button
is released.
● While the – button is pressed, playback takes place at
–1 times the normal speed (reverse playback).
When the button is released, the standby mode is
reengaged at the point where the button is released.
Pressing this button in VTR mode plays the tape in slow
playback.
☞ See “Status Screens” on page 21.
● Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the normal
screen mode displays the menu screen in the viewfinder
or on the LCD monitor. Pressing this button while the
menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD
monitor makes the menu screen disappear.
☞ See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.
4
[SHUTTER] Shutter/Menu dial
● Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal screen
mode (when the menu screen is not displayed), the shutter
speed switches between on/off.
● When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal
screen mode, the shutter speed indicator is shown for
about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
The shutter speed is changed when this dial is turned
while the shutter speed indicator is shown.
● Playback in FWD direction becomes faster each time the
+ button is pressed.
SLOW+1 → SLOW+2 → SLOW+3
↑
FWD
● Playback in REV direction becomes faster each time
☞ See “Adjusting the Shutter Speed” on page 90.
● When this dial is turned upward or downward while the
menu screen is displayed, the cursor ( ) also moves
upward or downward to allow selection of items in the
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press this
dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this dial
upward or downward to change the setting.
the − button is pressed.
SLOW−1 → SLOW−2 → SLOW−3
↑
REV
☞ See “Variable Slow Playback” on page 63.
☞ See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.
11
12
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
[AUTO IRIS] Auto iris level switch
[VTR] VTR mode indicator
This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.
To perform VTR playback or to input the DV signal from the
5
0
!
@
5
[AUTO IRIS] Auto iris level switch
This switch selects the automatic iris adjustment reference
value according to the condition in which the camera is used.
BACK L : Under back light (Opens the iris about 1 step
from the standard level.)
NORMAL : Normal condition
SPOT L : Under spotlight (Closes the iris about 1 step
from the standard level.)
9
0
A
[CAM] Camera mode indicator
This switch selects the automatic iris adjustment reference
value according to the condition in which the camera is used.
BACK L : Under back light (Opens the iris about 1 step
from the standard level.)
NORMAL : Normal condition
SPOT L : Under spotlight (Closes the iris about 1 step
from the standard level.)
This indicator lights when the camera is in the Camera
mode. To record the camera image, press the MODE switch
F to turn on this indicator. When the power is turned on,
the mode becomes the Camera mode.
DV connector
on page 19 (DV signal input is possible
7
with the GY-DV5101.), press the MODE switch
on this indicator.
to turn
^
[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch
This switch is used to turn the power on and off.
“POFF” is displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder
when the power is turned off.
[VTR] VTR mode indicator
This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.
To perform VTR playback or input the DV signal from the
DV connector 7 on page 19, press the MODE switch F to
turn on this indicator.
☞ See “SWITCH FUNCTIONS” on page 93.
☞ See “SWITCH FUNCTIONS” on page 93.
[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting ON/OFF button
and indicator
● This switch toggles the full auto shooting function on and
off.
● The indicator lights when in the full auto mode.
● Full auto shooting combines the auto iris, auto level control
(ALC) to automatically adjust the video signal level and
the white balance to their optimum levels.
The audio recording level will operate in the auto
adjustment mode.
● The iris is placed in automatic mode even if the iris mode
switch of the lens is in manual.
● The gain will vary continuously to the maximum of +18
dB. The shutter speed will vary continuously to the
minimum of 1/200 of a second.
6
6
[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting ON/OFF button
and indicator
● This switch toggles the full auto shooting function on and
off.
● The indicator lights when in the full auto mode.
● Full auto shooting combines the auto iris, auto level control
(ALC) to automatically adjust the video signal level and
the white balance to their optimum levels.
The audio recording level will operate in the auto
adjustment mode.
● The iris is placed in automatic mode even if the iris mode
switch of the lens is in manual.
● The gain will vary continuously to the maximum of +18
dB. The shutter speed will vary continuously to the
minimum of 1/240 of a second.
*
Wait 5 seconds or more before turning the power on again
after it has been turned off.
[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch
[VTR] Trigger button (Recording Start/Stop)
This switch is used to turn the power on and off.
“POFF” is displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder
when the power is turned off.
This button is used to start and stop recording.
(It is interlocked with the VTR trigger button on the front
and the VTR trigger button on the lens section.)
*
Wait 5 seconds or more before turning the power on again
after it has been turned off.
B
[VTR] Trigger button (Recording Start/Stop)
This button is used to start and stop recording.
(It is interlocked with the VTR trigger button on the front
and the VTR trigger button on the lens section.)
☞ See “FULL AUTO SHOOTING (FAS) FUNCTION” on
page 93.
☞ See “Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function” on page 93.
[BLACK] Black stretch/black compression switch
7
7
[BLACK] Black stretch/black compression switch
Switches the gain for the dark section of the image.
Set to an appropriate position depending on the video signal
to be shot.
STRETCH : By stretching the signal only for the dark
section, contrast in the dark sections of the
image is enhanced.
Switches the gain for the dark section of the image.
Set to an appropriate position depending on the video signal
to be shot.
STRETCH : By stretching the signal only for the dark
section, contrast in the dark sections of the
image is enhanced.
NORMAL : Standard mode.
COMPRESS: When an entire image is relatively light and
the contrast is low, the gain of the dark
sections is compressed to increase the
contrast.
NORMAL : Standard mode.
COMPRESS: When an entire image is relatively light and
the contrast is low, the gain of the dark
sections is compressed to increase the
contrast.
[LOLUX] LOLUX On/Off button
8
This button toggles the LOLUX mode on and off.
● LOLUX gain gives extremely low light level sensitivity for
special applications. This will result in an increase of 30
dB in the LOLUX mode.
The gain up value can be selected from the menu.
☞ See page 75.
● LOLUX operation takes priority over normal gain setting.
● If the unit is placed in the LOLUX mode when it is in full
auto shooting mode, the auto level control (ALC) (one of
the full auto shooting functions) will be made inactive, so
that the LOLUX mode is given preference (FAW still
remains active).
8
[LOLUX] LOLUX On/Off button
This button toggles the LOLUX mode on and off.
● LOLUX gain gives extremely low light level sensitivity for
special applications. This will result in an increase of 30
dB in the LOLUX mode.
● The gain up value can be selected from the menu.
☞ See page 75.
● LOLUX operation takes priority over normal gain setting.
● If the unit is placed in the LOLUX mode when it is in full
auto shooting mode, the auto level control (ALC) (one of
the full auto shooting functions) will be made inactive, so
that the LOLUX mode is given preference (FAW still
remains active).
☞ See “GAIN BOOST UNDER LOLUX CONDITION” on
page 92.
☞ See “GAIN BOOST UNDER LOLUX CONDITION” on
page 92.
[CAM] Camera mode indicator
This indicator lights when the camera is in the Camera
mode.To record the camera image, press the MODE switch
9
to turn on this indicator. When the power is turned on,
^
the mode becomes the Camera mode.
13
E-13
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont’d)
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont’d)
[Camera Setting Section]
EDITSEARCH
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
MONITOR
FILTER
FILTER
1
2
3200K
1
2
3200K
1
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
/
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
AUDIO
LEVE
AUDIO
LEVE
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
MODE
VTR
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
L
L
CAM
CAM
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch
#
C
[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch
Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is
insufficient illumination on the subject. The boosting level
differs depending on the switch position as follows:
(Factory presets)
● When shooting a human being indoors with a view to the
landscape out through a window.
● When shooting a human being in the shade on a fine
day.
CAUTION:
Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is
insufficient illumination on the subject. The boosting level
differs depending on the switch position as follows:
(Factory presets)
If a fast moving high-brightness section like a car in
sunlight is shot, the auto knee function may change
the brightness of the entire image along with the motion
of the object. In this case, set the auto knee function to
OFF.
L : 0 dB (no boosting is applied)
● When shooting a high-contrast scene.
L : 0 dB (no boosting is applied)
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)
● The boosting level for each switch position can be
changed with the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
☞ See page 75.
CAUTION:
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)
● The boosting level for each switch position can be
changed with the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
☞ See page 75.
If a fast moving high-brightness section like a car in
sunlight is shot, the auto knee function may change
the brightness of the entire image along with the motion
of the object. In this case, set the auto knee function to
OFF.
[WHT.BAL] White balance switch
%
Three white balance modes are selectable with this switch.
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the
resulting image will be noisy.
B
A
: If white balance is performed with the switch in
this position, it will be memorized into B.
: If white balance is performed with the switch in
this position, it will be memorized into A.
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the
resulting image will be noisy.
[OUTPUT] Color bar/Camera/Auto knee switch
$
This switch is used to select the output signal. When the
video signal from the shooting camera is selected, the auto
knee function is available.
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON: Outputs the video signal from the
shooting camera. In this mode, the auto knee function is
available.
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF: Outputs the video signal from
the shooting camera. In this mode, the auto knee function
is not available.
BARS: Outputs the colour bar signal. In this mode, the auto
knee function is not available. Set to this position when
adjusting the video monitor or when recording the colour
bar signal. Color bars will not appear when Full Auto is set
to ON or when in the VTR mode.
D
E
[OUTPUT] Color bar/Camera/Auto knee switch
[WHT.BAL] White balance switch
Three white balance modes are selectable with this switch.
PRST : A non-erasable white balance setting at 3200K.
(PRESET)
● FAW (Full-time Auto White) mode can be set to A, B or
PRESET with the CAMERA OPERATION menu. ☞ See
page 75.
In the FAW mode, video colour temperatures are
constantly sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper
white balance.
This switch is used to select the output signal. When the
video signal from the shooting camera is selected, the auto
knee function is available.
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON: Outputs the video signal from the
shooting camera. In this mode, the auto knee function is
available.
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF: Outputs the video signal from
the shooting camera. In this mode, the auto knee function
is not available.
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal. In this mode, the auto
knee function is not available. Set to this position when
adjusting the video monitor or when recording the color bar
signal. Color bars will not appear when Full Auto is set to
ON or when in the VTR mode.
B
A
: If white balance is performed with the switch in
this position, it will be memorized into B.
: If white balance is performed with the switch in
this position, it will be memorized into A.
PRST : A non-erasable white balance setting at 3200K.
(PRESET)
● FAW (Full-time Auto White) mode can be set to A, B or
PRESET with the CAMERA OPERATION menu. ☞ See
page 75.
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white
balance.
[MODE] Mode switching switch
^
This is a switch to select either the Camera mode or the
VTR mode. Each time this switch is pressed upward, the
mode is switched to either the Camera mode or the VTR
mode and the CAM indicator
or VTR indicator
lights
9
0
AUTO KNEE function
in accordance with the selected mode.
● Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.
● Select the VTR mode to playback or to output the DV
F
[MODE] Mode switching switch
When shooting a foreground subject, such as a person,
etc., with a high-brightness background, if the brightness
level is set for the foreground subject, the background image
will be blurred with white. In such a case, a clearer
background is obtained when the auto knee function is used.
It is effective especially in the following cases:
● When shooting a person indoors with a view to the
landscape out through a window.
AUTO KNEE function
This is a switch to select either the Camera mode or the
VTR mode. Each time this switch is pressed upward, the
mode is switched to either the Camera mode or the VTR
mode and the CAM indicator 9 or VTR indicator 0 lights
in accordance with the selected mode.
● Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.
● Select the VTR mode to playback or to input the DV signal
from the DV connector 7 on page 19.
When shooting a foreground subject, such as a human
being, etc., with a high-brightness background, if the
brightness level is set for the foreground subject, the
background image will be blurred with white. In such a case,
a clearer background is obtained when the auto knee
function is used.
signal from the DV connector on page 19.
7
(DV signal input is possible with the GY-DV5101.)
● When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the
Camera mode.
It is effective especially in the following cases:
● When shooting a person in the shade on a fine day.
● When shooting a high-contrast scene.
● When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the
Camera mode.
14
E-14
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont’d)
50K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
MIX : CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio are output mixed.
When this setting is selected, the menu screen can
be used to select whether the mixed sound or stereo
sound should be output via the PHONES jack.
(AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen)
When AUDIO MONITOR in the AUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of
CH-1 is output from the monitoring speaker.
CH-2 : The CH-2 channel audio is output.
q
w
e
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
y
u
r
t
View with cover open.
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
0
C
AUDIO
LEVEL
OPEN
PULL
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FRONT
REAR
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
FILTER
3200K
1
2
CH-1
CH-2
1
CH-1
CH-2
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
1
/
MONITOR
SELECT
SHUTTER
CH-1
CH-2
COUNTER
CH-1
AUTO
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MIX
TC
UB
FRONT
REAR
MANUAL
CH-2
D
E
MENU
☞ See “Outputting CH-3, CH-4 Channel Audio” on page 64.
☞ See “AUDIO/VIDEO Menu Screen” on page 79.
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
CH-1
CH-2
OPEN
AUDIO
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUDIO IN
CH-1
CH-2
LEVEL
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO SELECT
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
FRONT MIC +48V
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
TC GENE.
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
MANUAL
ON
OFF
PRST
CAUTION:
POWER
VTR
Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave
a switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be
generated and operation irregularities will occur.
i
o
ON
OFF
A
B
D
E
[COUNTER] Counter display switch
1
6
Monitoring speaker
[CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-1 audio level control
Adjust the audio level of the CH-1 audio channel with this
control.
● To use this control, set the CH-1 AUDIO SELECT switch
8 to “MANUAL”. This control works regardless of the
setting of CH1 FRONT VR item on the AUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen.
To use this control, set the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 control
switch on the front section (7on page 10) to the maximum
(10) position, or set the CH1 FRONT VR item on the
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen to “DISABLE”.
0
[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO IN] CH-1/CH-2 audio input
selector switch
This switch is used to select the input sound of the CH-1 or
CH-2 audio channel. It is selected for each of the CH-1 and
CH-2 channels.
FRONT : The sound from the FRONT MIC IN connector
on the front side section is input.
Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (This switch works when
the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen is set to
ON.)
TC : Set to this position to display time code values.
UB : Set to this position to display the user’s bits values.
In the Camera mode, the input sound can be EE monitored. In
the VTR mode, the speaker outputs the VTR playback sound.
The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR
SELECT switch C.
● The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound
level button 1 on page 12. The sound from this speaker
is not output if an earphone is plugged into the PHONES
jack 5 on page 19. This speaker also outputs various
warning sounds superimposed on other sound. ☞ See
“Alarm Sounds” on page 98.
REAR : The sound from the REAR AUDIO IN connector
on the rear side section is input.
[TC GENE.] Time code generator setting switch
Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode
or regeneration mode. It is also used to select the time code
run mode when the preset mode is selected.
PRST-FREE : The preset mode is selected, and the time
code run mode becomes the FREE run
mode.
A
[FRONT MIC +48V] Front microphone power
supply selector switch
This is set in accordance to the camera microphone
connected to the FRONT MIC IN connector.
2
7
8
LCD door
LCD monitor door.
[CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-2 audio level control
Adjust the audio level of the CH-2 audio channel with this
control.
● This control is valid only when the CH-2AUDIO SELECT
switch 9 is set to “MANUAL”.
ON
: Set to this position when the included
microphone or another requiring +48 V power
supply (phantom microphone) is connected.
The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door.
The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened.
The door can be turned to change the orientation of the
LCD monitor, and it can be rotated so that it can be
accommodated in the main body of the camera.
☞ See page 42.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). In this
setting, the time code always operates in the
run mode.
OFF
: Set to this position when connecting
microphone that does not require +48 Vpower
supply.
a
[CH-1 AUDIO SELECT] CH-1 audio selector switch
This switch is used to select the method for adjusting the
audio level of the CH-1 audio channel.
*
If this setting is used when recording scenes one after
another, the time codes become discontinuous at the
transition points between scenes.
B
[CH-1/CH-2 REAR AUDIO IN] CH-1/CH-2 Rear
audio input signal selector switch.
This switch is used to select the input sound signal from
the REAR AUDIO IN connector.
LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio
equipment, etc. The reference input level is +4 dBs.
MIC : Set to this position when the microphone is
connected. The reference input level is -60 dBs.
+48V : Set to this position when a microphone requiring
+48 V power supply (phantom microphone, etc.) is
connected. This connector supplies +48 V DC
current.
3
4
LCD door lock and release knob
To open the LCD door, move this knob in the direction toward
the rear section.
AUTO
: When audio at maximum volume is input, a
limiter activates to suppress the audio level.
The audio level does not increase when the
input level is low.
PRST-REC : The preset mode is selected, and the time
code run mode becomes the REC run mode.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). The
time code operates in the run mode during
recording only. If this setting is used when
recording scenes one after another, the time
codes are recorded as continuous time
codes.
[LCD BRIGHT +/–] LCD brightness +/– button
This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD monitor
display.
MANUAL : The audio level can be adjusted with the CH-1
AUDIO LEVEL control 6 or theAUDIO LEVEL
CH-1 control 7 on page 10.
●
●
Pushing the button in the + direction makes the monitor brighter.
Pushing the button in the – direction makes the monitor darker.
To use the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 control on the
front section, the CH1 FRONT VR item on the
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen should be set to
“ENABLE”.
● Pushing the +/− buttons simultaneously returns the setting
to the standard setting.
REGEN
: Regeneration mode, in which the unit reads
existing time codes on the tape and records
time codes in continuation of the existing
ones. Set to this position when you want to
add additional time codes to time codes
already recorded on the tape.
5
[DISPLAY] Display button
This button is for turning the LCD monitor display ON/OFF
and selecting the display mode.
When this button is pressed for a long time, the LCD monitor
display is turned ON or OFF.
Each time this button is briefly pressed while the LCD
monitor display is turned on, the display mode changes as
shown in the following.
9
[CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] CH-2 audio selector switch
This switch is used to select the method for adjusting the
audio level of the CH-2 audio channel.
CAUTION:
When connecting a component that does not require
+48 V power supply, make sure that the switch is not
set to +48V before the component is connected.
AUTO
: When audio at maximum volume is input, a
limiter activates to suppress the audio level.
The audio level does not increase when the
input level is low.
MEMO:
Preset of time code and user’s bits is performed on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu.
☞ See “TIME CODE OPERATION” on page 67.
☞ See “TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen” on page 83.
C
[MONITOR SELECT] Audio monitor selector switch
MANUAL : The audio level can be adjusted with the CH-2
This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and
playback sound output from the monitoring speaker 1 on
page 15 or the PHONES 5 jack on page 19.
Only image displayed → Characters shown enlarged
AUDIO LEVEL control 7.
↑
Image and characters displayed ←
CH-1 : The CH-1 channel audio is output.
15
16
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-3 Left Side Section
2-3 Left Side Section
PUSH
r
r
FRONT
MIC IN
FRONT
MIC IN
LINE OUT
LINE OUT
CH-1
LENS
CH-1
CH-2
LENS
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT
CH-2
e w q
e
w q
1 [MONITOR OUT] Monitor output connector (BNC)
● Composite video signal output connector.
● Video signals with setup level are output.
3 [CH-1/CH-2 LINE OUT] CH-1/CH-2 line output
[MONITOR OUT] Monitor output connector (BNC)
[CH1/CH2 LINE OUT] CH1/CH2 line output con-
nector (RCA)
1
3
● Composite video signal output connector.
Camera mode: The camera image is output.
VTR mode: The playback image is output in the VTR
playback mode.
● When a DV signal (IEEE 1394) is input, the EE image of
the input video signal is output. (GY-DV5101 only)
connector (RCA)
Output connector for audio signals.
● Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.
● Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.
● When a DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE sound of
the input audio signal is output in the VTR mode.
Output connector for audio signals.
(Whether or not setup level output should be enabled or
disabled can be selected with the SETUP item on the
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen.)
Camera mode: The camera image is output.
VTR mode: The playback image is output in the VTR
playback mode. When a DV signal (IEEE1394) is input,
the EE image of the input video signal is output.
● Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.
● Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.
● When a DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE sound of
the input audio signal is output in the VTR mode.
(GY-DV5101 only)
MEMO:
MEMO:
● Alarm sound is not output.
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS
(1/2) menu screen is set to ON, the same on-screen
indications as those on the viewfinder will be shown
on the external monitor.(Black and white indications)
MEMO:
● Alarm sound is not output.
MEMO:
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS
(1/2) menu screen is set to ON, the same on-screen
indications as those on the viewfinder will be shown
on the external monitor. (Black and white indications)
● The setup signal can be selected also for the EE
output signal of the DV input.
4 Microphone attachment holes
Microphone attachment holes
4
For attaching the microphone holder KA-A50U (optional)
when the optional microphone MV-P615U or MV-P618U is
used.
For attaching the microphone holder KA-A50U (optional)
when the optional microphone MV-P615U or MV-P618U is
used.
[Y/C OUT]Y/C output connector (4-pin)
2
● Output connector for separate YC video signal.
Camera mode: The camera image is output.
VTR mode: The playback image is output in the VTR
playback mode.
● When a DV signal (IEEE 1394) is input, the EE image of
the input video signal is output. (GY-DV5101 only)
☞ See “Attaching the Microphone (optional)” on page 33.
☞ See “Attaching the Microphone (Optional)” on page 33.
2 [Y/C OUT]Y/C output connector (4-pin)
● Output connector for separate YC video signal.
● Video signals with setup level are output. (Whether or
not setup level output should be enabled or disabled can
be selected with the SETUP item on the AUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen.)
Camera mode: The camera image is output.
VTR mode: The playback image is output in the VTR
playback mode. When a DV signal (IEEE1394) is input,
the EE image of the input video signal is output.
MEMO:
● When the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA
OPERATION menu screen is set to LETTER or
SQUEEZE, 16:9 aspect ratio distinction ID signal is
output.
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS
(1/2) menu screen is set to ON, the same on-screen
indications as those on the viewfinder will be shown
on the external monitor.(Black and white indications)
MEMO:
● When the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA
OPERATION menu screen is set to LETTER or
SQUEEZE, 16:9 aspect ratio distinction ID signal is
output.
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS
(1/2) menu screen is set to ON, the same on-screen
indications as those on the viewfinder will be shown
on the external monitor. (Black and white indications)
● The setup signal can be selected also for the EE
output signal of the DV input.
E-17
17
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-4 Top Section
2-5 Rear Section
4 [DC OUT] DC output connector
e
w
q
Connector for power output to a wireless microphone
transmitter, etc. The supply voltage is identical to the voltage
supplied to the unit (DC 17 V max. 0.3 A).
4
1
No.
1
Signal
GND
—
2
t
y
3
—
4
DC 12V (power through)
3
2
(Surface profile)
5 [PHONES] Earphone jack
BLANK SEARCH REW
STOP
FF
PLAY
STILL
q
r
This is a stereo mini-jack for connecting an earphone for
audio monitoring. Plug in an earphone or headphone with
a 3.5 mm diameter plug. The earphone can also be used to
monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circumstances.
The sound from the monitoring speaker is interrupted when
an earphone is connected here.
PHONES
DV INT
TALLY
u
DC IN
DC OUT
!
o
y
i
t
u
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO
SELECT item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen and
MONITOR SELECT switch C on page 16.
The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor
volume control 1 on page 12.
r
e
w
1 Cassette cover
5 [PLAY] button
The cassette cover can be opened by sliding the OPEN
knob 2. Open this cover to insert or remove a videocassette
from the unit. Normally, this cover should be closed.
Press to start playback. During still picture playback and
search mode, press this button to return to the normal
playback mode.
1 [TALLY] Tally lamp
This lamp lights up when the GY-DV5100 enters the record
mode. It blinks during the transition to the record mode.
● Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light and
the lighting pattern.
*
If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play mode
is entered, the playback video will be interfered with digital
noise.
MEMO:
CAUTION:
● The volume of the alarm sound is set with theALARM
VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen.
● When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound
should be output, the following setting should be
performed.
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to “MIX”.
Set theAUDIO MONITOR item on theAUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen to STEREO.
To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal
parts of the VTR unit, do not leave the unit with the
cover open for extended periods of time.
6 [STOP] button
Press to enter the stop mode.
☞ See “BACK TALLY” on page 87.
2 [CH-1/CH-2 REAR AUDIO IN] CH-1/CH-2 Audio
2 [OPEN] Cassette cover lock knob
Slide this knob to open the cassette cover.
7 [STILL] button
Press to enter the still picture mode during playback, in the
stop mode or in the search mode.
When the still picture mode has continued for about 3
minutes, the unit automatically switches to the stop mode.
(Tape protect mode)
input connector on the rear section
Connect external audio equipment or a microphone to this
connector.
● Set the CH-1/CH-2 REAR AUDIO IN switch B on page
16 in accordance with the connected equipment.
● To record the audio signal input through this connector,
set the CH-1 or CH-2 AUDIO IN switch 0 on page 16 to
“REAR”. The audio from this connector is recorded on
the channel set to “REAR”.
3 [EJECT] button
Located inside the cassette cover.
Press this button to eject the videocassette.
6 [DV/INT]DV/INT selector switch
This switch is used to select whether to connect the optional
DV Disk Recorder to this camera or a digital video
component to the 7 DV connector.
DV: Connect a digital video component to the DV
connector
INT: Connect a DV Disk Recorder to the camera
* Turn the camera off before using this switch.
MEMO:
8 [FF] Fast forward button
● It takes a few seconds before the videocassette is
ejected. Do not close the cassette cover during the
eject operation.
● Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette
during the eject operation. This could result in
damage.
Press this button to fast forward the tape.
● Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates
the fast forward mode.
● Pressing this button during playback, still picture playback
or reverse search initiates forward search.
No.
1
Signal
7 [DV] connector
Using a DV cable (optional), a digital video component with
DV connector can be connected here.
This connector is used for input and output of the DV signal
or to input the VTR control signal from a digital video
component with DV connector.
To record the DV signal from this connector, set the unit to
the VTR mode. (Press the MODE switch F on page 14
upward to turn on the VTR indicator.)
● Camera mode:
The DV compressed signal (IEEE1394) of the camera
image is output.
● VTR mode:
GND
HOT
2
1
2
9 [REW] Rewind button
Press this button to rewind the tape.
● Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode
initiates the rewind mode.
● Pressing this button during playback, still picture playback
or forward search initiates reverse search.
● Eject operation is not possible while the power is off.
3
COLD
3
4 Operation cover
Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.
3 [DC IN] DC input connector (XLR 4-pin)
Power input connector for 12 V DC. Connect to the optional
AA-P250 power adapter. When a cable is connected here,
the power supply from the battery pack is interrupted and
the source is switched to the power supplied through this
connector.
This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side.
0 [BLANK SEARCH] button
Press this button to locate blank parts (unrecorded parts)
on the tape, such as the end point of a recording.
Blank search starts when this button is pressed in the stop
mode. When a blank part (unrecorded part) on the tape is
detected, the unit enters the STILL status in the VTR mode
and the Standby status in the Camera mode.
MEMO:
When the STOP button (6) is pressed in the Camera
mode to set the VTR operation mode indicator to
indicate STOP, playback operations become possible.
No.
1
Signal
GND
The DV input signal from this connector can be recorded
on tape. During playback, the tape playback DV
compressed signal is output.
1
4
2
—
MEMO:
3
—
2
3
To receive FF/REW remote control signals from this
connector, select the setting with the REM FF/REW
MODE item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen.
4
+12V
18
19
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-5 Rear Section (Cont’d)
2-5 Rear Section (Cont’d)
i
PUSH
o
o
i
!
LINE OUT
CH-1
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT
!
CH-2
8 Battery holder
Mount Anton-Bauer battery pack here.
9 Battery release lever
This release lever is used to detach the battery pack.
☞ See “Attaching and Detaching an Anton-Bauer Battery
Pack” on page 36.
0 [BREAKER] Breaker button
The breaker trips when the power consumption exceeds
the capacity.
If the breaker trips, confirm that there are no abnormalities
and that the power consumption does not exceed the rated
wattage. If no abnormalities are detected, press the
BREAKER button before turning the power ON again to
put the camera in the operating status.
If the unit still does not work normally, please consult the
person in charge of professional video equipment at your
nearest JVC-authorized service agent.
Battery holder
8
Mount Flat shape type battery pack here.
☞ See “Using Flat Shape Type Battery Pack (optional)” on
page 36.
Battery holder lock release knob
This knob is used to open the battery case cover. Press the
knob while turning to open the cover.
9
0
[BREAKER] Breaker button
The breaker trips when the power consumption exceeds
the capacity.
If the breaker trips, confirm that there are no abnormalities
and that the power consumption does not exceed the rated
wattage. If no abnormalities are detected, press the
BREAKER button before turning the power ON again to
put the camera in the operating status.
If the unit still does not work normally, please consult the
person in charge of professional video equipment at your
nearest JVC-authorized service agent.
20
E-20
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder
In addition to showing the EE image and the playback picture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the following
character displays. To show characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY button briefly.
In addition to showing the EE image and the playback picture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the following
character displays. To show characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY button briefly.
■ Status screens (screens for checking the current camera settings)
■ Alarm message display
■ Status screens (screens for checking the current camera settings)
■ Alarm message display
■ Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera mode)
■ Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera mode)
OPEN
OPEN
■ Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera mode)
■ Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera mode)
■ Menu setting screens
■ Menu setting screens
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
PULL
OPEN
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
MEMO:
MEMO:
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUTO
MANUAL
MANUAL
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen is set to
ON, the character displays mentioned above are also output through the
MONITOR OUT connector and Y/C OUT connector.
● When the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen is set to
ON, the character displays mentioned above are also output through the
MONITOR OUT connector and Y/C OUT connector.
■ Status Screens
DISPLAY button
DISPLAY button
■ Status Screens
Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed to show one of the status screens.The contents of the status display are
divided into those for the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.
Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed to show one
of the status screens. The contents of the status display are divided into
those for the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.
● Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera mode, one of
4 status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, STATUS 1, STATUS 2,
STATUS 3)
● Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera mode, one of
four status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, STATUS 1, STATUS 2,
STATUS 3)
● One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode.
EDITSEARCH
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
FILTER
1
2
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
1
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
MEMO:
1
/
/
● One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode (DV signal input
mode).
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
MENU
● When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the
menu setting screen is displayed.To display the Status screen while
the menu setting screen is displayed, press the STATUS button to
return to the normal screen.
STATUS
button
STATUS button
MENU
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
MODE
MODE
VTR
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
L
L
CAM
MEMO:
CAM
● When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the
menu setting screen is displayed. To display the Status screen
while the menu setting screen is displayed, press the STATUS
button to return to the normal screen.
● The DISPLAY button can be pressed to show characters alone in
magnified size on the LCD monitor.
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
● The DISPLAY button can be pressed to show characters alone in
magnified size on the LCD monitor.
● Camera mode
(Example of display)
● VTR mode
(Example of display)
● Camera mode
(Example of display)
● VTR mode (DV signal input mode)
(Example of display)
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
20min
20min
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
20min
20min
SKIN AREA
FAS
6dB
FAW
I
SD
B
FAS
6dB
FAW
I
SD
SKIN AREA
FAS
6dB
FAW
I
SD
B
12.2V
FAS
6dB
FAW
I
SD
B
FIL1
F5.6
STBY
B
48k12.2V
01/02/03 01:23:45
48k
12.2V
FIL1
F5.6
STBY
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
PLAY
01/02/03 01:23:45
48
k
12.2V
48k
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
01/02/03 01:23:45
PLAY
01/02/03 01:23:45
STATUS 0
STATUS 1
STATUS
STATUS 0
STATUS 1
STATUS
FULL AUTO
GAIN
SHUTTER
WHITE BAL
IRIS LVL.
FILTER
ZEBRA
REMAIN
AUDIO
ON
6dB(L:0 M:9 H:18)
1/1000
A
NORMAL
3200K
70%–80%
123min(
32K(CH1M CH2M)
FULL AUTO
GAIN
SHUTTER
WHITE BAL
IRIS LEV.
FILTER
ON
6dB(L:0 M:9 H:18)
1/1000
A
NORMAL
3200K
)
ZEBRA
REMAIN
70%–80%
123min(
)
AUDIO
32K(CH1M CH2M)
01/02/03 01:23:45
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
01/02/03 01:23:45
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
STATUS 3
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
STATUS 2
21
E-21
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)
■ Status Screens in the Camera Mode
9
A
00:00:00:00
20min
FULL AUTO
GAIN
SHUTTER
WHITE BAL
IRIS LVL.
FILTER
ON
B
9dB(L:0M:9H:18)
1/1000
A
NORMAL
3200K
DD
1
2
3
4
5
6 E
7
I
SKIN AREA
FAS
–3dB
FAW
I
SD
B
FAS
–3dB
Event display area
Event display area
FAW
I
SD
B
ZEBRA
REMAIN
AUDIO
70–80%
123min(
32k(CH1MCH2M)
)
FIL1
F5.6
48
k
12.2V
0
STBY
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
STBY
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
8
H
F GD
C
STATUS 0 Screen
STATUS 1 Screen
STATUS 2 Screen
●
Status 0
No.
Item
Contents
1
Indication of the DV Disk Recorder status
Displayed when the optional DV Disk Recorder is connected.
: Displayed (white) when the DV Disk Recorder is
connected.
●
: Displayed (red) when the DV Disk Recorder is recording.
2
3
Indication of various function operations
ACCU-FOCUS : Blinks during the ACCU-FOCUS operation.
SKIN AREA
: Blinks while the skin tone detail color area is displayed.
: Displayed when ALC function alone is ON.
: Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON.
: Displayed when the SHUTTER function is ON.
ALC
FAS
S
Gain operation indication
* dB : Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB, LOLUX
and ALC.
LUX : Indicated when LOLUX is ON.
4
5
6
7
8
Indication of FAW operation
FAW : Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON.
Indication of Iris level operation
I : Indicated when IRIS BACK L or IRIS SPOT L is selected.
Indication of skin tone detail color operation SD : Indicated when skin tone detail is ON.
Indication of Black operation
Indication of date and time
B : Indicated when BLACK STRETCH or BLACK COMPRESSION is ON.
Indicates the date and time.
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display
style are set on the TIME/DATE menu.
LCD BRIGHT indication
When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT
button, the date and time indications and the FVTR mode indication are
turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed.
(Example) BRIGHT +5
Numeric value : Any of –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5.
+
22
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
9Event Indication
9Event Indication
When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the
change is made.
When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the
change is made.
Setting Condition
When the gain value is changed
When gain is ALC
Contents of Indications
GAIN –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB.
GAIN ALC
Setting Condition
When the gain value is changed
When gain is ALC
Contents of Indications
GAIN –3 dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB.
GAIN ALC
When the LOLUX mode is ON/OFF
When the AUTO KNEE is ON/OFF
When the FULL AUTO is ON/OFF
When the ZEBRA is ON/OFF
When the shutter speed is changed
LOLUX ON, LOLUX OFF
When the LOLUX mode is ON/OFF
When the AUTO KNEE is ON/OFF
When the FULL AUTO is ON/OFF
When the ZEBRA is ON/OFF
When the shutter speed is changed
LOLUX ON, LOLUX OFF
AUTO KNEE ON, AUTO KNEE OFF
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF
AUTO KNEE ON, AUTO KNEE OFF
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF
SHUTTER 1/6.25, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000
SHUTTER 1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000,
1/10000
When the variable shutter speed is changed
V. SHUTTER 1/50.1 to 1/2067.8
When the variable shutter speed is changed V. SHUTTER 1/60.1 to 1/2084.6
When the shutter is OFF (Shutter speed: 1/50) SHUTTER OFF
When the white balance value is changed (Example) WHITE BAL A <3200K>
When the shutter is OFF
(Shutter speed: 1/60)
SHUTTER OFF
Numeric value : Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300,
5200, 5600, 6500, 8000
When the white balance value is changed
(Example) WHITE BAL A <3200K>
Numeric value : Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300, 5200,
5600, 6500, 8000
●
Status 1
In addition to the information on the Status 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.
●
Status 1
No.
Item
Contents
In addition to the information on the Status 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.
0
Voltage indication
or
(Example) 12.2V : Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.
(Example) 100% : Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%].
(Example) 60min : Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min].
No.
Item
Contents
0
Voltage indication
or
(Example) 12.2V: Indicates battery voltage in 0.1V steps.
(Example) 100%: Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%].
(Example) 60min: Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min].
Battery indication
Select the display method with the BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF
(2/2) menu. ☞ See page 82.
Battery indication
Select the display method with the BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF
A
B
Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits (UB) indication Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.
(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
(2/2) menu. ☞ See page 82
A
B
Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits (UB) indication Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.
(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/
VF (2/2) menu screen.Whether the time code or user’s bits should be shown
is selected with the COUNTER switch inside the side cover.
Non-drop frame: Colon (:)
Drop frame: Dot (.)
User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/
VF (2/2) menu screen. Whether the time code or user’s bits should be
shown is selected with the COUNTER switch inside the side cover.
Remaining tape indication
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3
minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen.
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
* The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.
* When the unit is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the
indication of the remaining tape time appears.
Remaining tape indication
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3
minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen.
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
* The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.
* When the unit is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the
indication of the remaining tape time appears.
C
Audio sampling frequency indication
32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO menu screen
is set to 32 K. (Audio is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.)
48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO menu screen
is set to 48 K. (Audio is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling.)
C
Audio sampling frequency indication
32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu
screen is set to 32 K. (Audio is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz
sampling.)
48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu
screen is set to 48 K. (Audio is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling.)
D
E
Audio level meter indication
Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/
VF (2/2) menu.
Standard audio level indication
The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “■”.
D
E
Audio level meter indication
Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO DISPLAY item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu.
–20dB –12dB
–20dB, –12dB
☞ See “AUDIO REF. LEVEL” on page 80.
❘
❘
CH 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CH 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – +
CH 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – +
Standard audio level indication
The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “■”.
–20dB –12dB
–20dB, –12dB
❘
❘
☞ See “AUDIO REF. LEVEL” on page 80.
CH 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CH 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – +
CH 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – +
23
E-23
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)
■ Status Screen in VTR MODE (DV Signal Input Mode)
No.
Item
VTR mode indication
Contents
1
F
STBY
REC
: In record standby mode (record-pause mode)
: During recording
ED.FWD : Edit search in forward direction
ED.REV : Edit search in reverse direction
00:00:00:00
20min
2
3
DD
PLAY
FF
REW
STL
: During playback
: During fast forward
: During rewind
: During still picture playback mode
9
8
Event display area
BSRH : During blank search
6
4
FWD
REV
: During playback in forward direction (FWD1: About ×5 speed,
FWD2: About ×9 speed, FWD3: About ×20 speed)
: During playback in reverse direction (REV1: About ×5 speed,
REV2: About ×9 speed, REV3: About ×20 speed)
: Stop mode (Tape protect mode)
48k
12.2V
PLAY
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
STOP
7
5
EJECT : Cassette being ejected
– – – : No tape loaded
No.
Item
Contents
G
H
Iris indicator display
Iris F-value indication
▲ : Iris set higher than normal
■ : Iris set to normal
▼ : Iris set lower than normal
1
Indication of Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits (UB) In the playback mode, the recorded time code (hour, minute, second, frame)
is displayed. Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item
on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen. Whether to show the time code or the
user’s bits is selected with the COUNTER switch inside the side cover.
Indicates the F-number of the connected lens.
OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE
It is not displayed when the lens is removed. For some lenses, no display
appears.
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on
the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen.
2
Remaining tape time
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3
minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen.
I
Filter position indication
Indicates the current filter position
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
* The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide.
* When the unit is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the
indication of the remaining tape time appears.
FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD/
VF (1/2) menu screen.
●
Status 2
3
4
Indication of the DV Disk Recorder status
Displayed when the optional DV Disk Recorder is connected.
: Displayed (white) when the DV Disk Recorder is connected.
This screen displays the camera setup statuses.
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.
●
: Displayed (red) when the DV Disk Recorder is recording.
Indication
Indication Contents
Voltage indication
or
Battery indication
(Example) 12.2 V : Indicates battery voltage in 0.1 V steps.
(Example) 100%: Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%].
(Example) 60min: Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min].
Select the display method with the BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF
(2/2) menu. ☞ See page 82
FULL AUTO ON, OFF
GAIN
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15dB, 18 dB, LOLUX, ALC
SHUTTER
OFF, 1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250. 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000 (STEP), V.SCAN 1/60.1 to
1/2084.6 (VARIABLE), EEI (in ALC mode)
WHITE BAL A, B, PRESET, FAW
5
Time/Date indication
Recorded data are displayed during playback, fast forward, and rewind.
(Only when the DATE REC item is set to OFF (☞ See page 85))
During recording, the data from the DV connector is displayed.
In the stop mode, the current data is displayed.
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style
are set on the TIME/DATE menu screen.
IRIS LEVEL BACK L, NORMAL, SPOT L
FILTER
ZEBRA
REMAIN
3200K, 5600K+1/8ND, 5600K, 5600K+1/64ND
70-80%, 85-95%, OVER95%, OVER100%
Remaining tape time (min) or tape type (Example: 95 min (
))
When the date and time have not been set, the following indication appears.
– – / – – / – – – – : – – : – –
(when using MiniDV cassette),
* DVCAM indicates IC Memory compatible DVCAM cassette.
(when using standard cassette), DVCAM (when using DVCAM cassette)
In the case of other DVCAM cassette than IC Memory compatible cassette,
or
is indicated.
6
7
8
Audio sampling frequency indication
Audio level meter indication
VTR mode indication
The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during
playback.
(32 K, 48 K, 44.1 K)
AUDIO
Audio sampling frequency and audio level adjustment method (Example) 32K (CH1 Å CH2˜ ) Å (Auto)
˜ (Manual)
Displays the audio level meters during playback.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/
VF (2/2) menu screen.
●
Status 3
This screen only displays date and time, event display and warning indications.
* Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE MENU screen.
☞ page 45 “Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen”
Indicates the VTR operation status.
STBY, STOP, PLAY, REC, FF, REW, FWD, REV, STL, BSRH, – – – (No
tape loaded), SLOW: During variable playback in forward direction
(SLOW+1: About ×0.1 speed, SLOW+2: About ×0.2
speed, SLOW+3: About ×0.5 speed)
During variable playback in reverse direction
(SLOW–1: About ×–0.1 speed, SLOW–2: About
×–0.2 speed, SLOW–3: About ×–0.5 speed)
9
Event display
BLANK SEARCH : Indicates that blank search operation is in progress.
24
25
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)
■ Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor
■ Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor
The characters on the status screens can be showed alone in magnified size on the LCD monitor.
The characters on the status screens can be showed alone in magnified size on the LCD monitor.
1
1
OVER
CH1
OVER
CH1
-
48k
L
∞
40 30
20
10
0
dB
-
48k
L
∞
40 30
20
10
0
dB
OVER
CH2
OPEN
OVER
CH2
EDITSEARCH
OPEN
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
1
2
NDF
5600K 1/8 ND
FILTER
3200K
5600K 1/8 ND
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
1
2
TC12343410
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
FREE
H
M
S
F
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
FREE
PLAY
TC12343410
STATUS
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
H
M
S
F
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
PLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
PULL
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
SP
L
MODE
CAM
MANUAL
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
2
SP
CAM
MANUAL
213min
10.9V
2
213min
10.9V
3
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
■ When the DISPLAY button is pressed while the Status (0, 1,
2, 3) screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a status screen
is shown in the VTR mode, the displayed contents change
every time the DISPLAY button is pressed.
DISPLAY button
DISPLAY button
■ When the DISPLAY button is pressed while the Status (0, 1,
2, 3) screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a status screen
is shown in the VTR mode, the displayed contents change
every time the DISPLAY button is pressed.
Only image displayed → Characters shown enlarged
↑
Image and characters displayed ←
Only image displayed → Characters shown enlarged
↑
No.
Item
Audio Lock Indicator
Contents
Image and characters displayed ←
1
Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked
to the video signal.
2
3
Time Code Generator Setting Indicator
Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.
FREE : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.
RECR : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.
REGN: TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.
No.
Item
Audio Lock Indicator
Contents
1
Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked
to the video signal.
2
Time Code Generator Setting Indicator
Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.
FREE: TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.
RECR: TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.
REGN: TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.
Drop/Non-drop Indicator
Displayed during playback of a tape recorded in drop frame or non-drop
frame mode.
DF : During playback of a tape recorded in drop frame mode.
NDF : During playback of a tape recorded in non-drop frame mode.
26
E-26
E
U
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
■ Alarm Message Display
■ Alarm Message Display
● The following alarm messages are displayed while the Status(0, 1, 3)
screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a status screen is shown in
the VTR mode.
● The following alarm messages are displayed while the Status (0, 1, 3)
screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a status screen is shown in
the VTR mode.
If an alarm is generated while the Status 2 screen is shown, the Status
0 screen returns to display the alarm.
● When an abnormality occurs in the VTR, a warning message with an
error code is displayed.
If an alarm is generated while the Status 2 screen is shown, the Status
0 screen returns to display the alarm.
● When an abnormality occurs in the VTR, a warning message with an
error code is displayed.
Alarm display area
Alarm display area
Alarm display area
Alarm display area
FAS
–3dB
FAW
FAS
–3dB
FAW
I
I
SD
B
SD
B
12.2V
12.2V
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
Alarm Indication
Contents
Alarm Indication
Contents
PAL INHIBIT
REC INHIBIT
Displayed when attempt is made to play back a tape recorded with PAL signal.
NTSC INHIBIT
Displayed when attempt is made to play back a tape recorded with NTSC signal.
Displayed when an unrecordable videocassette (the switch on the back of the
cassette is set to “SAVE”) is loaded.
REC INHIBIT
Displayed when an unrecordable videocassette (the switch on the back of the
cassette is set to “SAVE”) is loaded.
COPY INHIBIT
LOW VOLTAGE
TAPE NEAR END
Displayed when attempt is made to record a copy-guarded signal.
Displayed when remaining battery power becomes low.
COPY INHIBIT
LOW VOLTAGE
TAPE NEAR END
Displayed when attempt is made to record a copy-guarded signal.
Displayed when remaining battery power becomes low.
Flashes when the remaining tape is 3 minutes or less in the shooting mode. It is
not shown in the playback mode.
Flashes when the remaining tape is 3 minutes or less in the shooting mode. It is
not shown in the playback mode.
TAPE END
Displayed when the tape has reached its end.
TAPE END
Displayed when the tape has reached its end.
INVALID TAPE!
Displayed when a data tape for PC use or DVC PRO cassette is used. The tape
is ejected.
INVALID TAPE!
Displayed when a data tape for PC use or DVC PRO cassette is used.The tape
is ejected.
LP TAPE INVALID!
NO TAPE
Displayed when attempt is made to playback a tape recorded in the LP mode.
LP TAPE INVALID!
NO TAPE
Displayed when attempt is made to playback a tape recorded in the LP mode.
Displayed when no videocassette is inserted and the VTR trigger button is
pressed.
Displayed when no videocassette is inserted and the VTR trigger button is
pressed.
NO DV SIGNAL
Displayed when there is no input to the DV connector and recording is attempted.
Displayed when attempt is made to play back a copy-guarded tape.
Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted.
NO DV SIGNAL (GY-DV5101 only)
COPY GUARD!
Displayed when there is no input to the DV connector and recording is attempted.
Displayed when attempt is made to play back a copy-guarded tape.
Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted.
COPY GUARD!
CLEANING TAPE!
CLEANING TAPE!
HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!
CLOSE CASSETTE COVER!
OPEN CASSETTE COVER!
VTR WARNING (Error code)
Displayed when head is clogged. Head cleaning is necessary.
Displayed when operation is attempted while the cassette cover is open.
Displayed when the cassette cover is closed during the eject operation.
HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!
CLOSE CASSETTE COVER!
OPEN CASSETTE COVER!
VTR WARNING (Error code)
Displayed when head is clogged. Head cleaning is necessary.
Displayed when operation is attempted while the cassette cover is open.
Displayed when the cassette cover is closed during the eject operation.
Displayed in case abnormalities occur in the VCR, or when condensation occurs
Displayed in case abnormalities occur in theVCR, or when condensation occurs
(Example)
7001
in the unit. For details, ☞ see page 97.
(Example)
7001
in the unit. For details, ☞ see page 97.
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
27
E-27
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
2-6 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)
2-7 Lens (Optional)
■ Auto White Balance Indication (Camera mode only)
[S14 x 7.3B12U]
7 IRIS mode switch
A
M
: Activates the auto iris feature.
: Allows manual iris control.
TheAUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are displayed
during the auto white balance adjustment operation.
☞ See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 50.
e
w
q
8 Momentary auto iris button
When the IRIS MODE switch 7 is at “M”, pushing this button
activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down only.
AUTO WHITE A
OPERATION
9 [S] IRIS speed adjusting control
For adjusting the iris operation speed.
MEMO:
If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur.
To avoid the phenomena described above, perform
adjustment again.
RET
M
A
■ Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only)
W
T
0 FILTER thread
The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON/OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and
CENTER MARK item on the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen. ☞ See page 81.
Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the front.
Other filters can be used for various effects.
r
t
y
u i
o
CAUTION:
The filter thread section rotates, so pay attention when
mounting a polarizing filter.
!
!
A ZOOM servo connector
Connect an optional zoom servo unit here.
SAFETY ZONE
CENTER MARK
OFF
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
NORMAL
ON
16 : 9
OFF
16 : 9
ON
B ZOOM mode knob
S : Servo zoom mode.Allows operation by the zoom servo
control lever 6.
M : Manual zoom mode. Allows zoom control by the zoom
lever/ring 2.
MEMO:
●
●
When the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is set to LETTER, 16:9 is indicated even if the
SAFETY ZONE item is set to NORMAL.
When the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is set to SQUEEZE while the SAFETY ZONE
item is set to 16:9, the SAFETY ZONE item is set to NORMAL and SAFETY ZONE is displayed in 4:3 ratio.
C BACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw
For back focus adjustment only. Secure with the screw knob
after adjustment.
☞ See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 49.
■ Menu Setting Screen
!
!
!
1 FOCUS ring
Manual focus ring.
D Macro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)
By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in
the macro mode.
To shoot images in the macro mode, set the focus ring 1
to the infinite position (∞) and the zoom ring 2 to the
maximum wide-angle position. To adjust the focus of the
macro image, rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow
until the object is focused.
––– MENU –––
Screen used for making various settings.
The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is pressed
for 1 second or more.
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
2 ZOOM lever/ring
This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.
To adjust the zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob B
to position “M”.
☞ See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.
CANCEL
3 IRIS ring
Manual iris ring. To activate the auto iris feature, set the Iris
Mode switch 7 to “A”.
TOP MENU screen (Camera mode)
4 [VTR] Trigger button
CAUTION:
To start/stop shooting.
● The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the
macro ring.
● After the required operation, be sure to return the macro
focusing ring to the normal position.
5 [RET] return video button
The return video signal from the VTR section can be
monitored in the viewfinder only while this button is pushed.
*
The playback picture can be viewed in the viewfinder
during this operation.
☞ See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 32.
☞ See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 49.
6 ZOOM servo control lever
To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the
ZOOM knob B to “S”.
● Pressing the “W” section of this lever increases the angle
of the lens for a wider shooting angle.
● Pressing the “T” section of this lever narrows the lens
angle perspective for telephoto shots.
● Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.
28
29
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2-8 1.5-Inch Viewfinder (Optional)
3-1 Basic System
* For information on connection with the individual attachments, refer to the page explaining the respective connection methods.
[VF-P115B]
1 Stopper screw
This screw prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camera.
2 SHOULDER BELT
*
6
2 Mounting guide
To attach on the camera.
3 Connector
EARPHONE
Connect to the camera.
4 [CONT] contrast adjustment
To adjust the contours of the viewfinder image.
MICROPHONE
MV-P615U
MV-P618U
1
5 [BRIGHT] brightness adjustment
3P
To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder.
MIC HOLDER
KA-A50U
6 [TALLY] switch
Set this switch to OFF to prevent the tally light 7from turning
on and informing people that they are being recorded.
However, the REC indicator lamp in the eyepiece will not
turn off.
VIDEO LIGHT
(ANTON BAUER.
PROTEC)
4
5
2
3
1.5" VIEW FINDER
VF-P115B
VF-P116
7 Tally light
Lights when recording is in progress. To prevent this light
from coming on, set the tally switch 6 to OFF.
Select the lightning method with the FRONT TALLY item
on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen.
DV CAMCORDER
ANTON BAUER
BATTERY CHARGER
ANTON BAUER
BATTERY HOLDER
(QR JVC DIGI)
ANTON BAUER BATTERY
☞ See page 87.
(
,
,
PRO PAC MAGNUM
MICROPHONE
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
,
)
MONITOR
TRIMPAC HYTRON
FILTER
3200K
1
2
5
6
0
0
K
1
/
8
ND
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
8 Eyepiece
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
A
U
D
I
O
I
N
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
A
U
D
I
O
S
E
L
E
C
T
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
L
A
UT
O
CAM
MANUAL
Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder
screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman.
The eyepiece can be opened to allow direct observation of
the viewfinder screen.
BATTERY
NP-1B TYPE
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ZOOM LENS
S14 × 7.3B12U(FUJINON)
S17 × 6.6BRM(FUJINON)
S20 × 6.4B12U(FUJINON)
YH16 × 7K12U(CANON)
YH19 × 6.7K12U(CANON)
BATTERY CHARGER
9 Eyepiece focusing ring
Loosen this ring to move the eyepiece back or forth to adjust
the diopter.
Non-linear Editing SYSTEM
TRIPOD BASE
GY-DV5100
STANDARD PACKAGE
4P
4P
(
)
VC-710 5m
AC
☞ See “Attaching the Viewfinder” on page 32.
AC POWER ADAPTER
(
)
BATTERY CHARGER
AA-P250
7
FOCUS MANUAL UNIT
DV VTR
(
)
1 HZ-FM13 FUJINON
*
(
)
HZ-FM15 CANON
TRIPOD
TP-P300
IEEE1394 CABLE
VC-VDV204(2m)(4P-4P)
VC-VDV206(2m)(4P-6P)
ZOOM SERVO UNIT
HZ-ZS13B
CARRYING CASE
BR-DV600A
BR-DV3000
BR-DV6000
DOLLY
TP-P205
MONITOR
8
Y/C CABLE
VCG30, VCG50
BNC CABLE
9
1 HZ-FM13 cannot be used with S14 × 7.3B12/U.
*
*
Please use the Focus Manual Unit (FMM-8, CHF-3, CFC-12-990) manufactured by Fujinon.
2 The optional service parts are required to attach the SHOULDER BELT.
1. PIN (SC46310-001) × 2
2. SPACER (SC46311-001) × 2
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.
30
31
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3-2 Attaching the Zoom Lens
3-4 Attaching the Microphone (Provided)
Connect the provided microphone to the viewfinder. The
provided microphone is a phantom microphone.
1. Loosen the mount ring.
1.3.
2. Connect the cable connector.
1. Loosen the stopper screw on the viewfinder.
Pin
4.
3. Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the mount.
2. Attach the microphone to the attachment guide on the
viewfinder as illustrated.
2.
4. Tighten the mount ring.
1.
4.
3.
3. Confirm that there is no gap between the microphone and
the viewfinder, and then tighten the stopper screw.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed
back focus.
● Set the GY-DV5100's power switch to “OFF” before the
zoom lens is attached or detached.
4. Tighten the screw on the microphone. The microphone
should be firmly attached.
Hole
5. Connect the cable from the microphone to the FRONT MIC
2.
IN connector on the camera.
6. Set the FRONT MIC +48V switch on the right side of the
When unplugging the cable connector, first remove the lens
itself. Then grasp this portion and pull out.
camera to ON.
5.
7.
7. Secure the microphone cable using the cable clamp
provided on the front side of the microphone holder.
Microphone cable
Cable clamp
3-3 Attaching the Viewfinder
By changing the position of the viewfinder mount base on the camera the viewfinder can be observed with either the left or the right
eye.
When shipped from the factory, the viewfinder mount base is attached so that the viewfinder is mounted for right eye use.
After the viewfinder has been attached, the viewfinder can be slid forward.
MEMO:
VF
When attaching the viewfinder for use with the left eye, the
provided microphone cannot be attached. In this case, use
the optional microphone holder KA-A50U and microphones
MV-P615U/618U (phantom microphone).
3-5 Attaching the Microphone (Optional)
■ Observing the viewfinder with the left eye
1.
Screw holes for left eye use
3.
Change the mounting position of the viewfinder mount base.
With the optional KA-A50U microphone holder, the optional
microphones MV-P615U (phantom microphone) and MV-P618U
(phantom microphone) can be used.
2,4.
KA-A50U
Microphone holder
1. Loosen the two fastening screws of the viewfinder mount
base with an hexagon wrench (Provided) and then remove
the viewfinder mount base (including the sliding securing
ring).
1.
2.Cap
<Attaching the Microphone Using KA-A50U>
Fastening screws
4.Cap
1. Secure the microphone holder with 2 screws.
2. Remove the cap.
HEXAGON WRENCH
2. Turn the small knob located on the outer side of the
microphone holder counterclockwise to loosen it, and loosen
the large knob located on the inner side in the same way.
Rotate the large knob fully counterclockwise to open the
holder.
3. Mount the viewfinder mount base (including the sliding
securing ring) at the screw holes for left eye use and tighten
the screw with the hexagon wrench (Provided).
Sliding securing
ring
5.
Mounting guide
1.
4.
Stopper
screw
4.Attach the removed cap on the right-eye side.
3. Attach the microphone to the microphone holder at the
designated place so that the microphone does not interfere
with the cassette cover.
3.
■ Attaching the Viewfinder
4. Set the microphone holder so that the height is level, and
tighten the inside and outside knobs to secure the
microphone.
1. Loosen the stopper screw.
Viewfinder
mount base
2. Connect the cable connector.
3. Attach the viewfinder with its guide aligned with the shoe.
4. Tighten the stopper screw.
2.
3.
5. Connect the microphone cable to the FRONT MIC IN
MV-P615U/MV-P618U
Connector
connector.
● When the microphone is connected to REAR AUDIO IN
connector on the rear panel, set the CH-1 or CH-2AUDIO
input selector switch to REAR.
5. Tighten the sliding securing ring.
*
Reverse the procedure to remove the viewfinder.
6. Secure the microphone cable using the cable clamp located
on the front side of the microphone holder.
Viewfinder
Sliding securing
ring
1.
3.
■ Sliding the viewfinder forward
1. Loosen the sliding securing ring.
2. Slide the viewfinder forward.
3. Tighten the sliding securing ring.
CAUTION:
6.
7. Make sure to perform the correct settings for use of a
phantom microphone.
☞ See “FRONT MIC +48V switch ” on page 16.
!
CAUTION:
● When the light mounted on the camera is used at the
same time, if the microphone in use has a long sound
collecting section, the microphone’s shadow may appear
in the image.
2.
● Set the GY-DV5100’s power switch to “OFF” before the
viewfinder is attached or detached.
FRONT MIC IN Microphone cable
5.
32
33
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3-6 Attaching the Tripod Base (Provided)
Use the provided tripod base to place the camera on a tripod.
1. Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that
balances the unit most optimally.
2. While pushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward
the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.
1. Tripod mounting holes
3. Place the unit on the tripod base by aligning the rear base
3. Pin
mount of the unit with the pin on the tripod base.
Front mount clip
4. Push the unit from the upward direction and slide it toward
the front so that the front base mount of the unit is locked
by the front mount clip of the tripod base as it clicks into
place.
2. Safety lever
CAUTION:
2.
● The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base
mount of the unit. Therefore, after mounting, make sure
that these parts are engaged properly.
Lock lever
4.
● When moving the unit mounted on a tripod, any impact
or vibration should be avoided as this may cause the
unit to become detached and to drop from the tripod.
Be sure to remove the unit from the tripod before
transporting it.
Front
base
mount
3.
Rear base
mount
4.
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
34
E
U
4. POWER SUPPLY
4. POWER SUPPLY
The GY-DV5100 is operable with AC power supply or battery pack.
The GY-DV5100 is operable with AC power supply or battery pack.
4-1 AC Operation
4-1 AC Operation
Use the JVC AA-P250 AC power adapter (max. rated output 12.5 V DC, 3.5 A) as the AC power supply.
Use the JVC AA-P250 AC power adapter (max. rated output 12.5 V DC, 3.5 A) as the AC power supply.
Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in the
Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in the
power source voltage, power sources generating noise,
such as ripples or power sources with lower voltage.
power source voltage, power sources generating noise,
such as ripples or power sources with lower voltage.
AA-P250
1. After making sure that the power switches of the GY-DV5100
and of the AA-P250 are set to OFF, connect the DC cable
from theAA-P250 to the DC IN connector of the GY-DV5100
as shown in the illustration.
1. After making sure that the power switches of the GY-DV5100
and of the AA-P250 are set to OFF, connect the DC cable
from the AA-P250 to the DC IN connector of the GY-DV5100
as shown in the illustration.
PHONES
DC IN
TALLY
AA-P250
D
V
I
N
T
DC cable
DC OUT
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
PHONES
DC IN
TALLY
D
V
I
N
T
DC cable
AC power adapter
DC OUT
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
2. Set the CHARGE/CAMERA switch of the AA-P250 to
2. Set the CHARGE/CAMERA switch of the AA-P250 to
CAMERA.
CAMERA.
AC power adaptor
3. Press the POWER switch of the GY-DV5100 to ON. Power
3. Press the POWER switch of the GY-DV5100 to ON. Power
is supplied to the VTR section and the camera.
is supplied to the VTR section and the camera.
*
For details, read the instruction manual of the AA-P250.
*
For details, read the instruction manual of the AA-P250.
MEMO:
MEMO:
Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording is
being performed.
Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording is
being performed.
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional)
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional)
The GY-DV5100 can be operated with the following battery packs.
The GY-DV5100 can be operated with the following battery packs.
■ Flat shape type battery pack
■ Anton-Bauer battery pack
● DIONIC 90
● Propack 13/14 Series
● Trimpack 13/14 Series
● Magnum 13/14 Series
● Compack 13/14 Series
■ Flat shape type battery pack
■ Anton-Bauer battery pack
● DIONIC 90
● Propack 13/14 Series
● Trimpack 13/14 Series
● Magnum 13/14 Series
● Compack 13/14 Series
*
An Anton-Bauer battery pack cannot be connected directly
to the GY-DV5100. It is necessary to mount the optional
battery holder.
Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QR JVC DIGI
For details on how to mount the battery holder, see page
37.
*
A flat shape type battery pack cannot be connected directly
to the camera. It is necessary to mount the optional battery
case.
Battery case: SCV2978-002
See “Attaching the NP-1B type Battery” on page 36.
● When the DC cable is connected to the DC IN connector, the power supply from the battery pack is interrupted and the power
starts to be supplied through the DC IN connector.
● When the DC cable is connected to the DC IN connector, the power supply from the battery pack is interrupted and the power
starts to be supplied through the DC IN connector.
● Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operating with a battery pack.
● Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operating with a battery pack.
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is connected or disconnected while operating with a battery pack.
• The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is disconnected.
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is connected or disconnected while operating with a battery pack.
• The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is disconnected.
• Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio signal are muted.
• Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio signal are muted.
● When operation is continued with DC input after the battery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER switch to OFF
after the DC power is applied. Then switch ON again.
● When operation is continued with DC input after the battery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER switch to OFF
after the DC power is applied. Then switch ON again.
● If the GY-DV5100 is left with the battery pack attached, a small amount of power is consumed even if the POWER
switch on the GY-DV5100 is set to OFF. Remove the battery pack when the GY-DV5100 is not going to be used.
● If the GY-DV5100 is left with the battery pack attached, a small amount of power is consumed even if the POWER
switch on the GY-DV5100 is set to OFF. Remove the battery pack when the GY-DV5100 is not going to be used.
35
E-35
E
U
4. POWER SUPPLY
4. POWER SUPPLY
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional) (Cont’d)
Attaching and Detaching an Anton-Bauer Battery Pack
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional) (Cont’d)
Using a Flat Shape Type Battery Pack (optional)
Attaching a Flat Shape Type Battery Pack
1. Open the battery case cover while pushing the lock release
Attaching the Battery Pack
Guide pins
Cassette cover side panel
lever.
1. Align the 3 guide pins of the battery pack with
Battery pack
2. Insert the battery pack into the battery case with its
the guide holes on the battery holder, and push
straight to insert the battery pack.
Guide holes
(x3)
electrodes facing the unit.
The battery cannot be attached properly if the
guide pins are not inserted straight.
3. Close the battery case cover.
Release lever
Release
lever
2. Slide the battery pack toward the side panel
where the cassette cover is located until it clicks.
Now the battery pack has been attached.
Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF before replacing
the battery pack.
Lock release
lever
OPEN
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO INPUT
Detaching the Battery Pack
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO
MANUAL
■ While pushing the release lever, slide the battery
pack toward the side panel where the LCD display
is located, then pull the battery pack outward to
remove.
Side panel
with display
Battery
Attaching the NP-1B type Battery
To use the NP-1 type battery, remove the Anton-Bauer Battery holder and attach the NP-1 type battery holder to the
camera. Use the following battery case.
Battery case: SCV2978-002
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.
Detaching the Anton-Bauer Battery Holder and Attaching the Battery Case
Be careful of pins.
CAUTION:
The Anton-Bauer Battery Holder has pin connectors. Be
careful not to touch these pin terminals when attaching or
2.
removing the battery and holder. Doing so may cause injury.
1.
1. Remove the four battery holder anchoring screws.
2. Disconnect the connector and battery holder connector
coming out of the camera.
1.
Connector
Compartment
Anton-Bauer
Battery holder
3. Remove the two black screws A for the battery case.
4. Remove the bottom portion of the battery case cover
4.
downwards.
3. Black screws A
36
E-36
E
U
4. POWER SUPPLY
4. POWER SUPPLY
Using an Anton-Bauer Battery Pack
Connector
5.
5. Connect the connector and battery holder connector coming
To use an Anton-Bauer battery pack (DIONIC 90, Propack 13/14, Trimpack 13/14, Magnum 13/14, Compack 13/14 Series), it is
necessary to detach the battery case from the GY-DV5100 and replace it with the Anton-Bauer battery holder. Use the following
battery holder.
Mount screws B
out of the camera.
6.
CAUTION:
• Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QR JVC DIGI
Following connection of the connectors, insert them into
the connector compartment.
Take care not to pinch the wires. This could result in
damage.
Detaching the Battery Case From the GY-DV5100 and Attaching The Anton-
Bauer Battery
Attaching the Anton-Bauer Battery Holder
Be careful of pins.
6. Attach the battery case with the four mount screws B.
Mount screws B
6.
4.
Wire layout
2.
5.
CAUTION:
Mount screws B use M3 × 6 mm screws.
1. Black screw A
1. Remove the two black screws A on the battery case.
7. Attach the battery case cover.
7.
2. Remove the lower half of the battery case cover in the
8. Attach the two battery case black screws A.
5.
downward direction.
Wire layout
Anton-Bauer
Connector
Connector
3.
Battery holder
Compartment
Mount screw B
3.
4. Connect the 2 connectors protruding from the battery holder
8. Black screws A
to the connectors on the camera.
CAUTION:
Using a Flat Shape Type Battery Pack (optional)
● Following connection of the connectors, insert them into
the connector compartment.
Take care not to pinch the wires. This could result in
damage.
● The Anton-Bauer Battery Holder has pin connectors. Be
careful not to touch these pin terminals when attaching
or removing the battery and holder. Doing so may cause
injury.
Attaching a Flat Shape Type Battery Pack
1. Open the battery case cover while pushing the lock release
lever.
2. Insert the battery pack into the battery case with its
Mount screw B
3.
electrodes facing the unit.
3. To remove the battery case, remove the four screws B fixing
the battery case and the connector connecting the battery
case to this unit.
5. Secure the battery holder to the GY-DV5100 with the four
3. Close the battery case cover.
mount screws provided with the battery holder.
Lock release
lever
Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF before replacing
the battery pack.
Attaching and Detaching an Anton-Bauer Battery Pack
Attaching the Battery Pack
Guide pins
Cassette cover side panel
1. Align the 3 guide pins of the battery pack with
the guide holes on the battery holder, and push
straight to insert the battery pack.
Battery pack
Guide holes
(×3)
The battery cannot be attached properly if the
guide pins are not inserted straight.
Release lever
Release
lever
2. Slide the battery pack toward the side panel
where the cassette cover is located until it clicks.
Now the battery pack has been attached.
OPEN
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO INPUT
Detaching the Battery Pack
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO
MANUAL
■ While pushing the release lever, slide the battery
pack toward the side panel where the LCD display
is located, then pull the battery pack outward to
remove.
Side panel
with display
Battery
37
E-37
4. POWER SUPPLY
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Optional) (Cont’d)
REMAINING BATTERY POWER DISPLAY
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the
BATTERY TYPE item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen
and BATTERY INFO item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu
screen in accordance with the type of the battery pack in
use.
LCD monitor
☞ See “BATTERY TYPE” on page 87.
☞ See “BATTERY INFO” on page 82.
LOW VOLTAGE
OPEN
When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the
following warnings will be generated.
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
10.5V
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
CH-2
■ Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor
AUTO
MANUAL
When a Status screen is displayed (excluding the Status 2
screen in the Camera mode)
● Alarm indication: LOW VOLTAGE displayed.
TALLY lamp
■ Viewfinder lamps
BATT lamp : Lights
ALARM lamp : Blinks
Viewfinder
■ BACK TALLY lamp on Camera : Blinks
LOW VOLTAGE
■ Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack: Alarm sound
10.5V
REC
After the remaining battery power warnings appear, the
GY-DV5100 automatically stops operation if the battery
power operation is continued.
BATT
ALARM
Battery lamp
REC/ALARM lamp
Operating Time with Battery Pack
When the VF-P115B is used as the viewfinder and a fully
charged battery pack is attached, the approximate continuous
operating time is as follows:
● Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of
the battery, charging conditions and the operating
environment, etc. Use the values in the table on the left for
approximate reference times.
● Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environment.
● Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and
LCD are used frequently.
Continuous Operating Time
Battery Pack
(at 25 ˚C)
NP-1B
60 minutes
(SONY)
DIONIC 90
300 minutes
(Anton-Bauer)
NP-L50(NP-1B Type)
180 minutes
(IDX)
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE BATTERY PACK
● When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a
cool, dry place.
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a car,
etc.), this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten service
life.
● When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty, the
operating time will be shortened.
● If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even
immediately after recharging, the service life of the battery
pack is nearly finished. Purchase a new battery pack.
Recharging
● Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could
result in reduced battery capacity.
● If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once discharge
the battery pack completely, then recharge it to restore the
battery capacity.
● If the battery pack is recharged with its internal temperature
raised immediately after use, recharging may not be
performed completely.
38
E
U
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5-1 Turning the Power ON
5-1 Turning the Power ON
MENU
MENU
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
MODE
MODE
VTR
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
L
L
CAM
CAM
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
/
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
PULL
OPEN
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO SELECT
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
AUTO
L
CAM
MANUAL
CAM
MANUAL
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MODE
indicator
MODE
indicator
MODE
switch
MODE
switch
POWER
switch
POWER
switch
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
The unit turns on in Camera mode.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
The unit turns on in Camera mode.
■ The operation differs according to whether the unit is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.
When the MODE switch is pressed upward, the mode is changed.
■ The operation differs according to whether the unit is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.
When the MODE switch is pressed upward, the mode is changed.
The Camera indicator or VTR indicator comes on in accordance with the selected mode.
The Camera indicator or VTR indicator comes on in accordance with the selected mode.
Mode
Camera mode
Operation
Mode
Camera mode
Operation
The GY-DV5100 enters the Camera mode. The camera image is displayed in the viewfinder
or on the LCD monitor. When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV5100 enters
the record-standby mode automatically. “STBY” is displayed in the VTR operation mode
indication area of the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. In this condition, press the VTR trigger
button to start recording.
The GY-DV5100 enters the Camera mode. The camera image is displayed in the viewfinder
or on the LCD monitor. When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV5100 enters
the record-standby mode automatically. “STBY” is displayed in the VTR operation mode
indication area of the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. In this condition, press theVTR trigger
button to start recording.
* Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.
* Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR
operation mode indicator to indicate STOP.
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR
operation mode indicator to indicate STOP.
VTR mode
The GY-DV5100 enters the VTR mode. The camera image will not be displayed in the
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor. When a videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV5100 enters
the stop mode.
VTR mode
The GY-DV5100 enters the VTR mode. The camera image will not be displayed in the
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor. When a videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV5100 enters
the stop mode.
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication area of the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication area of the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.
DV input is possible through the DV terminal.
DV input is possible through the DV terminal. (GY-DV5101 only)
Turning the Power OFF
Turning the Power OFF
1. Place the GY-DV5100 in the record-standby or STOP mode.
1. Place the GY-DV5100 in the record-standby or STOP mode.
2. Set the POWER switch to OFF.
2. Set the POWER switch to OFF.
3. Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC IN connector. (When the camera is not going to be used for a longer
3. Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC IN connector. (When the camera is not going to be used for a longer
period.)
period.)
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
● Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is taking place.
● Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is taking place.
Confirm that the STBY or STOP indication is shown in the VTR operation mode indication area before the power is turned off.
Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power on
again.
Confirm that the STBY or STOP indication is shown in theVTR operation mode indication area before the power is turned off.
Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power on
again.
● Always set the POWER switch to OFF before disconnecting the power supply
Do not turn the battery pack or AC power supply OFF while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.
● Always set the POWER switch to OFF before disconnecting the power supply
Do not turn the battery pack or AC power supply OFF while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.
39
E-39
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5-2 Cassette Loading and Unloading
OPEN knob
OPEN knob
EJECT button
Cassette cover
Cassette insertion slot
Cassette cover
Cassette
cover
Cassette
cover
● A cassette cannot be loaded or unloaded while the GY-DV5100 is in POWER OFF mode.
● Use a standard DV videocassette or a MiniDV videocassette.
● Press at the center portion of the cassette back and insert the cassette tape straight into the slot.
Unloading the Cassette
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
Loading the Cassette
2. Slide the OPEN knob to the side to open the cassette cover.
REC/SAVE switch
3. Press the EJECT button.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
Tape ejection starts.
2. Slide the OPEN knob to the side to open the cassette cover.
MEMO:
Standard DV
videocassette
● It takes a few seconds before the cassette is ejected
after the EJECT button is pressed.
3. Insert a videocassette into the cassette slot after removing
the tape slack.
● If the cassette is difficult to remove even when perform-
ing the eject operation, press the EJECT button again.
● Do not close the cassette cover during the eject opera-
tion.
■ Insert a standard DV videocassette along the cassette
insertion slot by pressing at the center portion of the cassette
back.
Cassette
insertion slot
■ Insert a MiniDV videocassette between the left and right side
guides on the cassette insertion slot.
The tape window should face outward and the cassette back
switch should be up. Press on the center of the back of the
videocassette and ensure that it is fully inserted.
4. Take out the videocassette.
5. Close the cassette cover.
CAUTION:
4. After the tape is completely loaded, slowly close the cassette
● Do not leave the unit for a long period with the cassette
cover open. Dirt or other foreign objects may enter the
VCR section and cause malfunction.
● Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette during
the eject operation. This could result in damage.
cover by pushing it in all the way.
■ The status when the tape is loaded differs with the mode of
the GY-DV5100 (Camera mode or VTR mode) and the
condition of the REC/SAVE switch on the back of the cassette
as show below.
Guide
MiniDV
videocassette
REC/SAVE Switch
REC
SAVE
Guide
Camera Record-standby mode STOP mode. REC
INHIBIT is displayed on
the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.
VTR
STOP mode
Recording can be started by pressing the VTR trigger button
from the record-standby mode.
After the cassette cover is closed, it takes about 10 seconds
before the unit can start recording or before it enters the
STOP mode.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to push the cassette all the way in while the
cassette is being pulled in automatically. This could result
in damage.
40
41
E
U
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5-3 Viewing the LCD Monitor
5-3 Viewing the LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor’s orientation, angle, and brightness, etc. can be changed.
The LCD monitor’s orientation, angle, and brightness, etc. can be changed.
LCD lock and release knob
LCD monitor
LCD lock and release knob
LCD monitor
■ Opening the LCD monitor
■ Opening the LCD monitor
Slide the LCD lock and release knob toward the rear section
to open the LCD monitor. Grasp the upper and lower edges
of the LCD monitor to open it easily.
Slide the LCD lock and release knob toward the rear section
to open the LCD monitor. Grasp the upper and lower edges
of the LCD monitor to open it easily.
■ Changing the orientation and angle of the LCD monitor
■ Changing the orientation and angle of the LCD monitor
LCD door
LCD door
● With the LCD door in the open position, turn the LCD door.
The LCD door can be turned 180 degrees upward and 90
degrees downward.
● With the LCD door in the open position, turn the LCD door.
The LCD door can be turned 180 degrees upward and 90
degrees downward.
● If the LCD door is turned 180 degrees upward and housed
in the camera body, the LCD monitor can be viewed from
outside while it remains housed in the camera body.
● If the LCD door is turned 180 degrees upward and housed
in the camera body, the LCD monitor can be viewed from
outside while it remains housed in the camera body.
Downward
90 degrees
Downward
90 degrees
Upward 180
degrees
Upward 180
degrees
LCD monitor
LCD monitor
■ Displaying on the LCD monitor
■ Displaying on the LCD monitor
● When the DISPLAY button is pressed for a long time, the
display on the LCD monitor is switched between ON and
OFF.
● When the DISPLAY button is pressed for a long time, the
display on the LCD monitor is switched between ON and
OFF.
LCD monitor
LCD monitor
● Each time the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the
LCD monitor is used for display, the contents change as
follows.
● Each time the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the
LCD monitor is used for display, the contents change as
follows.
Image only → Characters displayed magnified
Image only → Characters displayed magnified
OPEN
OPEN
↑
↑
Image and Characters ←
Image and Characters ←
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
DISPLAY button
DISPLAY button
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
■ Adjusting the LCD monitor
■ Adjusting the LCD monitor
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUTO
MANUAL
MANUAL
● Brightness of screen : Adjust with the LCD BRIGHT +/–
● Brightness of screen : Adjust with the LCD BRIGHT +/–
button.
button.
● Color saturation
: Adjust the LCD COLOR item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu.
● Colour saturation
: Adjust the LCD COLOR item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu.
● Contrast of screen : Adjust the LCD PEAKING item on
● Contrast of screen : Adjust the LCD PEAKING item on
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu.
the LCD/VF (2/2) menu.
LCD BRIGHT +/– button
LCD BRIGHT +/– button
LCD/VF (2/2) menu
LCD/VF (2/2) menu
––– LCD/VF(2/2) –––
––– LCD/VF(2/2) –––
BATTERY INFO
TAPE REMAIN
TC/UB
VOLTAGE
ON
ON
BATTERY INFO
TAPE REMAIN
TC/UB
VOLTAGE
ON
ON
AUDIO
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
AUDIO
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
LCD COLOR
LCD PEAKINGS
PAGE BACK
LCD COLOR
LCD PEAKINGS
PAGE BACK
42
E-42
E
U
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
5-4 Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date and Time
5-4 Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date and Time
The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Powered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data continue to
count even when the power is switched off.
The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Powered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data continue to
count even when the power is switched off.
● The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accordance with the
● The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accordance with the
settings made on the menu screen.
settings made on the menu screen.
Setting the Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time
1
1
2
.3
.4
2
.3
.4
5600K
5600K
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATU
5600K
5600K
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATU
1
1
/
/
SHUTTER
dial
SHUTTER
dial
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
FILTER
3200K
5600K 1/8 ND
1
2
1
2
5600K 1/8 ND
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
STATUS
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
PULL
OPEN
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
MODE
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
AUTO
L
CAM
MANUAL
CAM
MANUAL
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
L
L
POWER switch
POWER switch
STATUS button
STATUS button
TOP MENU screen
TOP MENU screen
––– MENU –––
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
● The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST menu
screen.
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the
VIDEO OUT or Y/C OUT connector, set the OUTPUT CHAR.
item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen to ON.
● The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST menu
screen.
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the
VIDEO OUT orY/C OUT connector, set the OUTPUT CHAR.
item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen to ON.
CANCEL
CANCEL
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to display
2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to display
the TOP MENU screen.
the TOP MENU screen.
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in
the direction of the camera body.
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in
the direction of the camera body.
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
● The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.
● The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
UB REC
ON
4. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.
4. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
PAGE BACK
5. Make settings on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This
includes display style, etc.)
5. Make settings on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This
includes display style, etc.)
DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the date.
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)
DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the date.
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)
TIME/DATE menu screen
TIME/DATE menu screen
––– TIME/DATE –––
––– TIME/DATE –––
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
BARS+CAM
OFF
BARS+CAM
OFF
TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-
hour or 24-hour clock system.
SEC DISPLAY : To select whether or not indication of
seconds should be displayed on the
screen.
TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-
hour or 24-hour clock system.
SEC DISPLAY : To select whether or not indication of
seconds should be displayed on the
screen.
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
24HOUR
ON
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
DD/MM/YY
24HOUR
ON
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.
MEMO:
MEMO:
The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY and DATE STYLE items
can also be set and changed after the date and time have
been set.
The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY and DATE STYLE items
can also be set and changed after the date and time have
been set.
● The setting area stops blinking and the setting is
entered.
● The setting area stops blinking and the setting is
entered.
43
E-43
5. PREPARATIONS
5-4 Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date andTime (Cont’d)
TIME/DATE menu screen
6. Display the screen for setting the date and time.
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
CLOCK ADJUST item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The CLOCK ADJUST screen appears.
––– TIME/DATE –––
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
BARS+CAM
OFF
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
24HOUR
ON
7. Set the date and time.
The blinking digit is the one to be set.
1When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit
moves to the next digit.
2When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the
blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.
3Repeat the procedure described in 1and 2above to
set the month, day, year, hours, minutes.
The digits indicating seconds cannot be set.
4Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to
enter the date and time precisely.
CLOCK ADJUST menu screen
DATE (Year/Month/Day)
––– CLOCK ADJUST –––
DATE(MM/DD/YY)
TIME
12/12/02
09:33
PAGE BACK
8. When all the settings are completed, rotate the SHUTTER
dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item, and then
press the SHUTTER dial.
● The TIME/DATE menu screen returns.
9. To return to the normal screen, use either of the following
methods.
Press the STATUS button
or
Time (Hour:Min)
Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the EXIT
item from the TOP MENU screen before pressing the
SHUTTER dial.
44
E
U
5. PREPARATIONS
5. PREPARATIONS
Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen
Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen
Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.
Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
1. Display the TIME/DATE menu screen.
1. Display the TIME/DATE menu screen.
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
ON
screen.
screen.
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
2Select the TIME/DATE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.
2Select theTIME/DATE item on theTC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
UB REC
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
2. Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.
2. Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.
● DISPLAY item
: Sets whether or not date and
time should be displayed. Set to
ON to display the indications.
● DISPLAY item
: Sets whether or not date and
time should be displayed.Set to
ON to display the indications.
PAGE BACK
MEMO:
MEMO:
To display the date and time recorded on the tape, set the
DATE REC item to OFF. When the DATE REC item is set
to BARS or BARS+CAM, the date and time recorded on
the tape are not displayed even if this item is set to ON.
To display the date and time recorded on the tape, set the
DATE REC item to OFF. When the DATE REC item is set
to BARS or BARS+CAM, the date and time recorded on
the tape are not displayed even if this item is set to ON.
TIME/DATE menu screen
TIME/DATE menu screen
––– TIME/DATE –––
––– TIME/DATE –––
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
BARS+CAM
OFF
BARS+CAM
OFF
● DISPLAY MODE item : Sets the video output mode in
which date and time should be
displayed.
● DISPLAY MODE item : Sets the video output mode in
which date and time should be
displayed.
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
24HOUR
ON
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
DD/MM/YY
24HOUR
ON
BARS
: Displayed when the OUTPUT switch
on the side section is set to BARS.
: Displayed when the OUTPUT switch
on the side section is set to CAM.
BARS
: Displayed when the OUTPUT switch
on the side section is set to BARS.
: Displayed when the OUTPUT switch
on the side section is set to CAM.
CAM
CAM
BARS + CAM : Date and time are always displayed.
● DISPLAY STYLE : Sets the style in which the date and
time are displayed.
BARS + CAM : Date and time are always displayed.
● DISPLAY STYLE : Sets the style in which the date and
time are displayed.
DATE + TIME: Date and time are displayed.
DATE + TIME: Date and time are displayed.
DATE
TIME
: Date only is displayed.
: Time only is displayed.
DATE
TIME
: Date only is displayed.
: Time only is displayed.
FAS
–3dB
FAW
FAS
–3dB
FAW
■ Display of date and time in the various operation modes.
■ Display of date and time in the various operation modes.
I
I
SD
B
12.2V
SD
B
12.2V
In Camera mode
: The date and time of the internal
clock are displayed.
In Camera mode
: The date and time of the internal
clock are displayed.
In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the
In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
tape are displayed.
tape are displayed.
(Only when the DATE REC item is
set to OFF.)
: The last read date and time values
are displayed.
(Only when the DATE REC item is
set to OFF.)
: The last read date and time values
are displayed.
Date
Time
Date
Time
In VTR stop mode
In VTR stop mode
During DV signal input: The date and time from the DV
During DV signal input: The date and time from the DV
(GY-DV5101 only) connector are displayed.
connector are displayed.
Recording the Date and Time Data
Recording the Date and Time Data
To record the date and time data during shooting, make the
menu settings described below. When the DATE REC item on
the TIME/DATE menu screen is set to “BARS” or “BARS+CAM”,
the screen size will be fixed at an aspect ratio of 4:3.
To record the date and time data during shooting, make the
menu settings described below. When the DATE REC item on
theTIME/DATE menu screen is set to“BARS”or“BARS + CAM”,
the screen size will be fixed at an aspect ratio of 4:3.
TIME/DATE menu screen
TIME/DATE menu screen
––– TIME/DATE –––
––– TIME/DATE –––
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
ON
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
ON
■ Setting the TIME/DATE menu
■ Setting the TIME/DATE menu
BARS+CAM
BARS+CAM
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
24HOUR
ON
BARS+CAM
BARS+CAM
DATE+TIME
DD/MM/YY
24HOUR
ON
● DISPLAY item : Set to ON.
● DATE REC item : Select the video mode in which date
● DISPLAY item : Set to ON.
● DATE REC item : Select the video mode in which date
and time data should be recorded.
: Date and time data are recorded only
when color bars are output.
and time data should be recorded.
: Date and time data are recorded only
when colour bars are output.
BARS
BARS
BARS+CAM : Date and time data are recorded when
BARS+CAM : Date and time data are recorded when
colour bars and camera image are
output.
color bars and camera image are output.
: Date and time data are not recorded.
OFF
OFF
: Date and time data are not recorded.
MEMO:
MEMO:
DATE REC cannot be set during recording.
DATE REC cannot be set during recording.
45
E-45
5. PREPARATIONS
5-5 Charging the Built-in Battery
The built-in, rechargeable backup battery retains the date and time and the time code data. The built-in battery is constantly being
charge whenever the GY-DV5100 is connected to a power supply, but it gradually discharges while the GY-DV5100 is disconnected
from a power supply. The battery will be fully discharged when the GY-DV5100 is not used for about three months, in which case
the set date and time and time code data are reset. In this case, recharge the built-in battery and then set the date and time and
time code data again.
However, it is possible to use the GY-DV5100 even if the bulit-in battery is discharged but the date and time and time code data
cannot be recorded.
■ How to charge
AC outlet
AA-P250
PHONES
DC IN
TALLY
D
V
I
N
T
DC cable
DC OUT
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
AC power adapter
1. Connect the provided AC adapter AA-P250 to the GY-DV5100 and an AC outlet or mount a charged battery on the GY-DV5100.
2. Set the POWER switch on the GY-DV5100 to “OFF” or “ON” (charging takes places with the POWER switch set to either of the
positions.)
3. Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours.
● The built-in battery will remain charged for about 3 months after being charged for about 4 hours.
46
E
U
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6-1 Camera Settings
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6-1 Camera Settings
1. POWER SUPPLY
1. POWER SUPPLY
1First place a charged battery pack in the battery case on
the rear section of the unit. If battery pack is not used,
connect DC power to the DC INPUT connector on the
rear section of the unit using the AC power adapter (AA-
P250) to supply DC 12 V current.
1First place a charged battery pack in the battery case on
the rear section of the unit. If battery pack is not used,
connect DC power to the DC INPUT connector on the
rear section of the unit using the AC power adapter (AA-
P250) to supply DC 12 V current.
3.
3.
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
2
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
/
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT
REAR
PULL
OPEN
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
2Set the POWER switch to ON.
2Set the POWER switch to ON.
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
L
AUTO
VTR
CAM
MANUAL
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
2. SWITCH positions
2. SWITCH positions
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
A. MODE switch: Camera mode (CAM indicator should be
on).
A. MODE switch: Camera mode (CAM indicator should be
on).
B. [GAIN] switch: Set to L. The L position is always 0 dB.
C. [OUTPUT] switch: Set to CAM-AUTO KNEE OFF.
D. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or B.
B. [GAIN] switch: Set to L. The L position is always 0 dB.
C. [OUTPUT] switch: Set to CAM-AUTO KNEE OFF.
D. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or B.
2.
1.
2.
1.
CAM
indicator
CAM
indicator
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
3. Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (AUTO IRIS side)
3. Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (AUTO IRIS side)
4. Choose the proper color temperature conversion filter.
4. Choose the proper colour temperature conversion filter.
FILTER
Suitable Location
Indoors, dark outdoors
Outdoors under clear sky
Outdoors
FILTER
Suitable Location
Indoors, dark outdoors
Outdoors under clear sky
Outdoors
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
1
2
3
4
3200K
1
2
3
4
3200K
5600K+1/8ND
5600K
5600K+1/8ND
5600K
5600K+1/64ND
Outdoors under clear sky
5600K+1/64ND
Outdoors under clear sky
5. Using the SHUTTER dial, set the shutter speed to OFF
5. Using the SHUTTER dial, set the shutter speed to OFF (1/
(1/60).
50).
VF
VF
4.
5.
4.
5.
OFF ZEBRA
OFF ZEBRA
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
ON
ACCU
FOCUS
ACCU
FOCUS
VTR
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/LETTER/SQUEEZE) Mode Selection
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/LETTER/SQUEEZE) Mode Selection
The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
☞ See page 75.
☞ See page 75.
● To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT RATIO to 4:3.
● To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT RATIO to 4:3.
● When ASPECT RATIO is set to LETTER, the image is recorded in a 16:9 aspect ratio with the upper and lower parts of the image
● When ASPECT RATIO is set to LETTER, the image is recorded in a 16:9 aspect ratio with the upper and lower parts of the image
cut. In this case, the viewfinder screen or LCD will show the 16:9 aspect ratio image with the upper and lower parts of the image
cut.
cut. In this case, the viewfinder screen or LCD will sbhow the 16:9 aspect ratio image with the upper and lower parts of the image
cut.
● When the ASPECT RATIO is set to SQUEEZE, 16:9 image is output vertically squeezed to fit 4:3 screens.
● When the ASPECT RATIO is set to SQUEEZE, 16:9 image is output vertically squeezed to fit 4:3 screens.
MEMO:
MEMO:
● The safety zone of the standard screen and the 16:9 screen can be displayed in the viewfinder or LCD by setting the
SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen. ☞ See page 81.
● When ASPECT RATIO is set to LETTER or SQUEEZE, 16:9 aspect ratio distinction ID signal is output from the Y/C OUT
terminal.
● The safety zone of the standard screen and the 16:9 screen can be displayed in the viewfinder or LCD by setting the
SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen. ☞ See page 81.
● When ASPECT RATIO is set to LETTER or SQUEEZE, 16:9 aspect ratio distinction ID signal is output from the Y/C OUT
terminal.
● When setting DATE REC in the TIME/DATE menu screen to “BARS” or “BARS+CAM”, the screen size will be fixed at an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
● When setting DATE REC in the TIME/DATE menu screen to “BARS” or “BARS + CAM”, the screen size will be fixed at an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
47
E-47
E
U
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment
1. Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.
1. Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.
2.
2.
2. Diopter adjustment
2. Diopter adjustment
1.
1.
Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen
image is clearly visible.
Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen
image is clearly visible.
Eyepiece
Eyepiece
3. Brightness and contrast adjustment
3. Brightness and contrast adjustment
When the ambient brightness changes, etc., the brightness
and contrast of the viewfinder screen can be adjusted with
the BRIGHT and CONT controls.
When the ambient brightness changes, etc., the brightness
and contrast of the viewfinder screen can be adjusted with
the BRIGHT and CONT controls.
1.
1.
2.
Eyepiece
focusing ring
2.
Eyepiece
focusing ring
1.
1.
MEMO:
MEMO:
The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT RATIO item
on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen (4:3 or
LETTER).
The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT RATIO item
on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen (4:3 or
LETTER).
3.
3.
3.
3.
BRIGHT
BRIGHT
CONT
CONT
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment
Display the camera built-in color bar signal on the video monitor
and adjust the colors, contrast and brightness.
Display the camera built-in colour bar signal on the video monitor
and adjust the colours, contrast and brightness.
PUSH
Color video monitor
Colour video monitor
1. Connect a color video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
1. Connect a colour video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
connector of the GY-DV5100.
connector of the GY-DV5100.
1.
1.
2. Set the COLOR BARS/CAMERA/AUTO KNEE switch to
BARS to output the color bar signal (SMPTE type color
bars).
2. Set the COLOR BARS/CAMERA/AUTO KNEE switch to
BARS to output the colour bar signal (EBU type colour bars).
3. Set the monitor’s BLUE CHECK function to ON while the
colour bars are being displayed so that the screen turns
entirely blue and the colour bars become blue stripes.
3. Set the monitor’s BLUE CHECK function to ON while the
color bars are being displayed so that the screen turns
entirely blue and the color bars become blue stripes.
LINE OUT
LINE OUT
CH-1
CH-1
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT
CH-2
CH-2
3.~8.
3.~8.
4. Adjust the CHROMA control of the monitor so that there is
4. Adjust the CHROMA control of the monitor so that there is
no difference in brightness between the color bars 1and
8, 7and D.
no difference in brightness between the colour bars 1and
7.
2.
2.
5. With the BLUE CHECK function ON, adjust the PHASE
control of the monitor so that there is no difference in
brightness between the colour bars 3and 5.
5. With the BLUE CHECK function ON, adjust the PHASE
control of the monitor so that there is no difference in
brightness between the color bars 3and 0, 5and B.
6. If the phase control adjustment above causes a difference
in brightness between the colour bars 1and 7, start again
from the CHROMA control adjustment in step 4.
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
6. If the phase control adjustment above causes a difference
in brightness between the color bars 1and 8, 7and D,
start again from the CHROMAcontrol adjustment in step 4.
7. Set the monitor’s BLUE CHECK function to OFF to switch
the monitor back to the standard screen (R, G and B will all
appear).
7. Set the monitor’s BLUE CHECK function to OFF to switch
the monitor back to the standard screen (R, G and B will all
appear).
■ SMPTE type color bars
■ EBU type colour bars
8. Use the monitor's brightness control to adjust so that the
color bars Hand Idisappear but Jis visible.
White Yellow Cyan
Green Magenta
Red
Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blue
Black Magenta Black
Cyan
Black
White
8 9 0 A B C D
Black
White
Black
E F
G
HIJ K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
48
E-48
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6-5 Back Focus Adjustment
6-6 White Balance Adjustment
It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the
telephoto and wide-angle positions.
Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance when
the main light source illuminating the subject changes.
Note
3. 4.6. 5.
When a subject illuminated by a halogen lamp with a color temperature of 3,200K is shot while the color temperature conversion
filter setting is set to 5,600K, 5,600K+1/8 ND, or 5,600K+1/64 ND, a proper white balance adjustment and (FAW) Full TimeAuto
White balance may not be accomplishable. In this case, change the color temperature conversion filter setting to 3,200K and
then carry out the white balance adjustment and (FAW) again.
It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more
than 3 meters from the camera.
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star
chart.
● Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance adjustment.
RET
M
A
1. Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).
Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored in
memories AUTO1 and AUTO2.
W
T
WHITE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
FILTER knob
2.
2. Set the zoom mode to M (Manual).
Ⅲ Adjustment procedure
3. Open the iris by turning the iris ring. If the illumination is too
1. Set the following switches.
strong, reduce it or move to a darker place.
1.
● Set the POWER switch to ON.
Iris mode
switch
1.
● Set the OUTPUT switch to CAM-AUTO KNEE.
● Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).
4. Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum
telephoto position.
2. Set the FILTER knob according to the current lighting.
5. Bring the subject into focus.
3. Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.
6. Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.
7. Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob.
WHT.BAL
switch
OUTPUT
switch
POWER
switch
3.
1.
1.
4. Place a white object near the centre of the screen under
the same lighting conditions as the target subject and zoom
in to fill the screen with white.
8. View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for
AUTO WHT.
/ACCU FOCUS switch
5.
2. 7.8.10.
the best possible focus.
5. Tilt theAUTO WHT./ACCU FOCUS switch upward (toAUTO
WHITE) once and release it.
“AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION” is displayed in the
viewfinder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit
operates.
9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine
adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.
AUTO WHITE A
OPERATION
AUTO WHITE A
OK <3200K>
When correct white balance is obtained, the approximate
color temperature is displayed together with “AUTO WHITE
A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.
10.Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the
ring.
During operation
Result message
Error messages
MEMO:
ACCU FOCUS can also be used in the above step 3.
If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.
AUTO WHITE A
NG:OBJECT
AUTO WHITE A
ERROR:LOW LIGHT
● NG: OBJECT (Improper object)
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an object
or the color temperature is not suitable.
Siemens star chart
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use another
white object and re-adjust the white balance.
Improper object
Insufficient illumination
● ERROR: LOW LIGHT (Insufficient illumination)
Displayed when the illumination is dim. Increase the
illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.
AUTO WHITE A
ERROR:OVER LIGHT
● ERROR: OVER LIGHT (Excessive illumination)
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease the
illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.
Excessive illumination
FULL-TIME AUTOWHITE BALANCE (FAW)
The FAW function adjusts the white balance value
automatically as the lighting condition changes.
CAUTION:
● The FAW (Full-timeAuto White balance) function cannot
provide optimum white balance with a subject outside
the FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.
● The accuracy of the FAW (Full-timeAuto White balance)
is inferior to that of the Auto white balance.
● When the power is turned on with the FAW mode
selected, it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW
adjustment to be completed. Do not shoot within this
interval.
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and
out of places under different lighting conditions.
■ Setting procedure
The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on the
CAMERAOPERATION menu screen. The FAW function can
be allocated to one of the white balance switching switches
A, B, or PRESET.
☞ See “CAMERA OPERATION menu screen” on page 75.
49
50
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
6-8 Recording Level Adjustment
6-7 Audio Input Signal Selection
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
OPEN
AUDIO
LEVEL
EDITSEARCH
PULL
OPEN
VF
MONITOR
OPEN
FILTER
EDITSEARCH
FRONT
REAR
1
2
.3
3200K
MONITOR
1
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
VF
5600K
5600K
.4 5600K
FILTER
3200K
1
2
1
CH-1
CH-2
/
CH-1
CH-2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
MENU
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
SHUTTER
CH-1
CH-2
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUTO
PULL
OPEN
MENU
MANUAL
FRONT
REAR
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
PULL
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
MODE
AUDIO IN
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-1
CH-2
L
MODE
AUDIO IN
CAM
MANUAL
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
O
F
F
Z
E
B
R
A
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
PHONES
DC IN
T
ALL
Y
O
F
F
Z
E
B
R
A
POWER
VTR
ACCU
D
V
I
N
T
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
FOCUS
ON
OFF
ON
WHITE
POWER
VTR
VTR
ACCU
FOCUS
ON
OFF
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
CH-1 AUDIO SELECT switch
DC OUT
CH-2 AUDIO
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
SELECT switch
CH-1 audio input level control
CH-2 audio input level control
CH-1 audio input level control
FRONT MIC IN
connector
REAR AUDIO IN
connector
CH-1 AUDIO IN switch
CH-2 AUDIO IN
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
switch
For each audio channel, use the AUDIO SELECT switches to
select whether the audio level adjustment should be set toAUTO
mode or MANUAL mode.
■ Using the audio input level control on the front section
MONITOR
SELECT
FRONT MIC +48V
COUNTER
TC
UB
CH-1
MIX
FRONT
REAR
Set the audio input level control on the front section to
CH-2
1
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO
LEVEL
(ON/OFF) switch
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
REAR
maximum (10) position.
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO IN
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
TC GENE.
FRONT MIC +48V
ON OFF
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
MANUAL
● When set to AUTO
: Audio input level is fixed. In this
mode, the audio input level
control does not function.
PRST
Initially, adjust the audio input level using the CH-1 audio
input level control on the side.
If a loud sound is input during recording, use the audio
input level control on the front section to lower the audio
input level.
2
3
REAR AUDIO IN
(LINE/MIC) switch
● When set to MANUAL: Audio input level can be adjusted
using the audio input level
controls for each audio input.
(The AUTO mode is selected in
the Full Auto shooting mode.)
The GY-DV5100 is provided with the FRONT MIC IN connector
and the REAR AUDIO IN connector for audio input.
■ Selecting the REAR AUDIO IN connector
Viewfinder Status 1 Mode
Select the sound to be input to the REARAUDIO IN connector
using the REAR AUDIO IN (LINE/MIC) switch. The setting is
made individually for both the REAR AUDIO IN connector.
Two channels of sound can be recorded on the tape in digital
PCM format. Using the AUDIO IN switch, select for each
channel (CH-1 and CH-2) whether the sound to be recorded
should be the sound from the FRONT MIC IN connector or the
sound from the REAR AUDIO IN connector.
00:00:00:00
20min
MEMO:
The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can be
set with theAUDIO REF. LEVELitem on theAUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen. (–20 dB or –12 dB). The level will change for
both CH-1 and CH-2.
LINE
: Set to this position when connected to audio
equipment, etc.
The reference input level is +4 dBs.
: Set to this position when using a monaural
microphone.
FAS
–3dB
FAW
I
■ Selecting the CH-1 channel input sound
MIC
SD
Make the selection using the CH-1 AUDIO IN switch.
FRONT : The sound from the FRONT MIC IN connector is
recorded on the CH-1 channel.
REAR : The sound from the REAR AUDIO IN connector is
recorded on the CH-1 channel.
FIL1
F5.6
B
The reference input level is –60 dBs.
■ Adjusting the audio input level control on the front
48k
12.2V
+48 V
: Set to this position when
a
microphone
section
ED.FWD 01/02/03 AM01:23:45
(phantom microphone) requiring +48 V DC
power supply is connected.
The audio input level control on the front section only affects
the CH-1 channel sound.
Audio level
To use the audio input level control on the front section, make
the following settings.
● Set the CH-1 AUDIO SELECT switch to MANUAL.
● Set the CH1 FRONT VR. item on theAUDIO/VIDEO menu
screen to ENABLE.
■ Selecting the CH-2 channel input sound
CAUTION:
Indicator level (reference)
Before connecting a component that does not require +48
V power supply, make sure that the REARAUDIO IN (LINE/
MIC) switch is not set to +48 V.
Neglecting this could cause damage to the connected
component.
Make the selection using the CH-2 AUDIO IN switch.
FRONT : The sound from the FRONT MIC IN connector is
recorded on the CH-2 channel.
REAR : The sound from the REAR AUDIO IN connector is
recorded on the CH-2 channel.
∞
–26
–20
–15
–11
–7
–3
0dB OVER
MEMO:
CAUTION:
■ Selecting the FRONT MIC IN connector
The audio input level controls on the side section work
regardless of the setting of CH1 FRONT VR. item on the
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen.
● When the REAR AUDIO IN LINE/MIC switch is set to
MIC, be sure to check that the microphone is connected
to the REAR AUDIO IN connector. If the microphone is
not connected, increasing the audio level could cause
noise from the input connector to be recorded on the
tape. When the microphone is not connected to the
REAR AUDIO IN connector, set the REAR AUDIO IN
LINE/MIC switch to LINE or turn down the audio level
control.
Select the microphone to connect to the FRONT MIC IN
connector using the FRONT MIC +48V (ON/OFF) switch.
ON:
Set to this position when a microphone requiring
+48 V power supply (phantom microphone) is
connected.
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when the GY-
DV5100 is in the record, record-standby or stop mode.
Use this setting to connect the included
microphone to the FRONT MIC IN connector.
Set to this position when connecting a
microphone that does not require +48 V power
supply.
1. Set theAUDIO SELECT switch of the channel whose audio
level that you want to adjust manually to MANUAL.
OFF:
● In the Full Auto shooting mode, the audio level volume
cannot be adjusted with the audio level controls on the
front and side sections.
2. Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the
audio input level to be adjusted.
● Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the –3dB
point when a loud sound is input.
CAUTION:
Before connecting a component that does not require +48 V
power supply, make sure that the FRONT MIC +48V (ON/
OFF) switch is not set to ON.
Neglecting this could cause damage to the connected
component..
51
52
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
6-9 Monitoring Audio during Recording
7-1 Basic Recording Operation
OPEN knob
3.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
MONITOR SELECT switch
● Power is supplied to the unit.
2. The CAM indicator lights up.
The GY-DV5100 is in the Camera mode when the CAM
indicator is on.
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
MONITOR
SELECT
COUNTER
TC
UB
CH-1
MIX
FRONT
REAR
CH-2
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
ON OFF
MONITOR
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
FILTER
3200K
OPEN
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
1
2
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
TC GENE.
EDITSEARCH
CH-1
1
/
MONITOR
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
MANUAL
SHUTTER
FILTER
3200K
PRST
1
2
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
MENU
3. Slide the OPEN switch on the top section to open the
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
1
OPEN
/
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
SHUTTER
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
L
A
UTO
cassette cover.
CAM
MANUAL
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO INPUT
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
POWER
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
4. Insert a videocassette into the cassette insertion slot.
● Ensure that the erasure-prevention switch on the back of
the cassette is set to REC and insert a videocassette
properly.
L
AUTO
ON
OFF
CAM
MANUAL
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
MODE
PHONES jack
When the cassette is inserted, the tape is loaded and the
unit enters the record-standby mode.
VTR
CAM
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
● Slowly close the cassette cover.
Monitoring volume Monitoring speaker
control
2.
MEMO:
● Use
a
standard DV videocassette or
a
MiniDV
videocassette. (When a DVCAM cassette is used for
recording, longer recording can be performed than the
time indicated on the DVCAM cassette. For the recording
time, regard the remaining tape indication displayed on
the LCD or in the viewfinder as a guide.)
● Following loading of the cassette and when the POWER
switch is turned ON/OFF, the built-in head cleaner will
emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
1.
The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop mode
can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or earphone.
MEMO:
7. 8. 9.
When connecting a stereotype earphone, make the
following settings to output stereo sound.
● Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to MIX.
● Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/VIDEO
menu screen to STEREO.
● When AUDIO MONITOR in the AUDIO/VIDEO menu
screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of CH-1 is
output from the monitoring speaker.
● The monitoring audio is not output from the speaker while
the PHONES jack is in use.
● Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONITOR
SELECT switch.
CH-1 : The sound input to the CH-1 channel is output.
MIX : The sound input to the CH-1 and CH-2 channels is
output mixed.
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
● After the cassette cover is closed, it takes about 10
seconds before the unit is ready for recording.
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH
MODE
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
A
CH
VTR
L
CAM
CH-2 : The sound input to the CH-2 channel is output.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
● The Monitoring volume control adjusts the monitoring volume.
5. Adjust the camera section settings and the white balance.
☞ See “Camera Settings” on page 47.
☞ See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 50.
● The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the
case of an abnormal condition occurring in the unit.
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached or
when the battery is running down. The volume of the alarm
tone is set with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS
(2/2) menu screen. (OFF/LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH)
6.Focusing ring
6. Zoom ring
6. Point the camera at the subject and determine the angle of
7. 8. 9. VTR trigger button
view and focus with the zoom lever and the focusing ring.
7. Start recording.
Press the VTR trigger button on the GY-DV5100 to start
recording.
*
Do not increase the audio monitoring volume excessively;
otherwise howling with the camera microphone may
occur.
Once recording has started, the BACK TALLY lamp on the
rear section of the unit and the tally lamp on the viewfinder
light red, and the REC indication in the viewfinder lights
green.
MEMO:
● The lightening conditions of the BACK TALLY lamp on
the rear section of the unit and the tally lamp on the
viewfinder can be changed by setting the BACK TALLY
and FRONT TALLY items on the OTHERS (2/2) menu
screen.
● Menu operations cannot be performed when an optional
DV Disk Recorder is connected and is recording.
8. TALLY lamp
OFF ZEBRA
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
ACCU
FOCUS
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
7. 8. 9. VTR trigger button
53
54
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7-2 Searching for Recorded Scenes (Edit Search)
In the record-standby mode, it is possible to search for a scene when you want to check the recorded scene or continue recording
from the scene.
8. To stop recording:
Press the VTR trigger button on the unit or on the lens
section again. The TALLY lamp and REC indicator lamp go
out and the unit enters the record-standby mode.
When the VTR trigger button is pressed, the unit enters the
record-standby mode after rewinding the tape for about 2
seconds (back-spacing).
EDIT SEARCH
REC
BATT
ALARM
7.8
EDIT SEARCH
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
+ button
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
9. To restart recording:
/
SHUTTER
MENU
Press the VTR trigger button on the GY-DV5100 or lens.
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
EDIT SEARCH
– button
MODE
AUDIO IN
ATUS
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
10.Ending recording:
L
CAM
MANUAL
Press the VTR trigger button to enter the record-standby
mode and perform the following operations as required.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
8. TALLY lamp
■ When it is required to unload the videocassette:
1Slide the OPEN knob to open the cassette cover.
2Press the EJECT button to take out the videocassette.
7. 8. 9. VTR trigger button
■ When the power should be turned off
Screen indications during Edit Search
Engage the record-standby mode.
Set the POWER switch to OFF.
During Edit Search, the VTR mode is indicated as ED.FWD or
ED.REV on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (When Status
1 screen is displayed.)
■ Searching the tape in forward direction
When the camera is not going to be used for a long period,
detach the battery pack.
1. Press the EDIT SEARCH + button. While the + button is
pressed, playback takes place at the normal speed.
About the QUICK REC START Mode
2. When the EDIT SEARCH + button is released, the standby
If the VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after the
videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the QUICK
REC START mode that enables quick start of recording.
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked
smoothly with the previous image.
00:00:00:00
20min
mode is reengaged.
■ Searching the tape in reverse direction
1. Press the EDIT SEARCH – button. While the – button is
FAS
–3dB
FAW
I
pressed, playback takes place at -1times the normal speed.
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may
also occur.)
2. When the EDIT SEARCH – button is released, the standby
SD
mode is reengaged.
FIL1
F5.6
B
48k
12.2V
MEMO:
ED.FWD 01/02/03 AM01:23:45
● Block noise may appear and the image may freeze
during search.
ED.FWD: Forward search
ED.REV: Reverse search
7.8. TALLY lamp
OFF ZEBRA
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
ACCU
FOCUS
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
7. 8. 9. VTR trigger button
CAUTION:
● The unit enters the STOP mode automatically at TAPE END. If this mode continues for 3 minutes, the mode switches to the
tape protect mode.
☞ See “LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS (1/2) menu screen” on page 86.
● If the VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly and repeatedly, or the POWER switch is moved immediately after the trigger
button is pressed, the viewfinder REC indicator lamp may blink and the GY-DV5100 may not enter the record mode. To
remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power on again.
● A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be guaranteed if a recording is ended by turning the POWER switch or
DC power supply OFF, or by removing the battery pack.
● Trial-shooting is always recommended before recording important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory.
● The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’ iris if the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved abruptly
during recording. If the sound is found annoying, please purchase an optional microphone in order to move the microphone
away from the lens or ensure that the iris is not changed abruptly during shooting.
55
56
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7-3 If the Record-Standby Mode Continues
Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged
When the record-standby mode has continued for about 5
minutes, the GY-DV5100 automatically stops drum rotation in
order to protect the tape. (Tape protect mode)
The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from the
record-standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 minutes
with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS (1/2) screen
menu.
● In the tape protect mode, STOP is shown as the VTR mode
indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder screen.
(Status 1 screen)
■ To start recording from the tape protect mode, press the
VTR trigger button.
00:00:00:00
20min
● The drum starts rotating, and recording starts after about
3 seconds.
■ To return to the record-standby mode from the tape
protect mode, press the RET button.
48
k
STOP
01/02/03 AM01:23:45
VTR mode indication
7-4 Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby Mode (Recording Check Function)
This function is available only when the GY-DV5100 is in the
standby mode.
RET button
In the record-standby mode, approximately 2 seconds of the
last recorded portion can be played back.
● The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD monitor
or in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the
MONITOR OUT or Y/C OUT connectors.
● The video image from the VTR section is shown on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder or on the monitor connected to
the MONITOR OUT or Y/C OUT connectors.
1. In the record-standby mode, press the RET button on the
camera lens section.
•
The tape is slightly rewound and played back for
approximately 2 seconds.
After playback is finished, the tape returns to the position
at which the RET button is pressed and the record-
standby mode resumes.
■ When the RET button is kept pressed, the tape is rewound
and played back for approximately 15 seconds at maximum.
● Pressing the VTR trigger button during playback will put
the unit in REC standby mode. The camera will
automatically return to recording mode after playback.
*
*
This function does not work when the GY-DV5100 is in
the stop mode.
During recording check, the following indication will
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,
etc.
•
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is shown on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder. (When the Status 0, 1, 3
screen is displayed.)
57
E
U
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7-5 HEADER REC Function
7-5 HEADER REC Function
When the VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the color bar video and the test
tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal and the
mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance.
When the VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the colour bar video and the
test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal and
the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance.
When the recording is completed, the unit enters the Record-Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position
becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER REC function)
When the recording is completed, the unit enters the Record-Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position
becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER REC function)
● Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on the
HEADER REC menu screen.
● Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on the
HEADER REC menu screen.
● The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:
Mode switch: Set to CAM mode.
● The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:
Mode switch: Set to CAM mode.
In the Record-Standby or Stop mode
In the Record-Standby or Stop mode
Record-Standby mode
Record-Standby mode
Tape
beginning
Tape
beginning
HEADER REC
HEADER REC
Normal recording
Normal recording
(Example) 30 sec
(Example) 30 sec
(Example) 30 sec
(Example) 30 sec
Color bar video signal
Test tone (1 kHz)
Black video signal
Mute audio (No sound)
Color bar video signal
Test tone (1 kHz)
Black video signal
Mute audio (No sound)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)
Time code, user’s bits recording
Time code, user’s bits recording
Time code, user’s bits recording
Time code, user’s bits recording
Time code:
User’s bits:
Time code:
User’s bits
Time code:
User’s bits:
Time code:
User’s bits
The value specified on the
HEADER REC menu screen
– HEADER REC time
(Example) 23:59:00:00
The value specified for the
UB DATA item on the
HEADER REC menu screen.
The value specified on
the HEADER REC
menu screen.
The value specified for
the UB PRESET item
on the TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.
The value specified on the
HEADER REC menu screen
– HEADER REC time
(Example) 23:59:00:00
The value specified for the
UB DATA item on the
HEADER REC menu screen.
The value specified on
the HEADER REC
menu screen.
The value specified for
the UB PRESET item
on the TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.
(Example) 00:00:00:00
(Example) 00:00:00:00
■ HEADER REC menu screen contents
■ HEADER REC menu screen contents
Item
Description
Item
Description
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
START KEY
STOP+VTR: Select this setting to turn ON the HEADER REC
function.
DISABLE: Select this setting when the HEADER REC
function should not operate.
START KEY
STOP+VTR: Select this setting to turn ON the HEADER REC
function.
DISABLE: Select this setting when the HEADER REC
function should not operate.
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
ON
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
TC DATA
Sets the time code value for the point when the HEADER
REC operation is completed and the Record-Standby mode
is engaged.
● When the TC GENE switch is set to PRESET REC or
REGEN, the value set for this item becomes the time code
value at the point when the next normal recording is started.
● The Frame mode will be in accordance with the setting of
the DROP/NON DROP item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.
TC DATA
UB DATA
Sets the time code value for the point when the HEADER
REC operation is completed and the Record-Standby mode
is engaged.
● When the TC GENE switch is set to PRESET REC or
REGEN, the value set for this item becomes the time code
value at the point when the next normal recording is started.
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
UB REC
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
PAGE BACK
*
The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby
mode is engaged may differ some frames from this set value.
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.
● The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
This item cannot be set when the UB REC item on the TC/
UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to OFF. In this case,
“- - - -” is displayed.
*
The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby
mode is engaged may differ some frames from this set
value.
*
HEADER REC menu screen
HEADER REC menu screen
UB DATA
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.
● The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
––– HEADER REC –––
––– HEADER REC –––
START KEY
TC DATA
STOP+VTR
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
START KEY
TC DATA
STOP+VTR
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
Sets the duration for recording of the color bar video signal
and test tone (1 kHz). [Setting range: 0 to 99 sec]
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
Sets the duration for recording of the color bar video signal
and test tone (1 kHz). [Setting range: 0 to 99 sec]
UB DATA
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
UB DATA
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
Sets the duration for recording of the black video signal and
mute audio signal. [Setting range: 0 to 99 sec]
Sets the duration for recording of the black video signal and
mute audio signal. [Setting range: 0 to 99 sec]
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
30SEC
30SEC
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
30SEC
30SEC
TheTC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER
dial is pressed.
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER
dial is pressed.
58
E-58
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
■ How to set the HEADER REC menu screen
1. Display the HEADER REC menu screen.
Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to display
the TOP MENU screen. Use the SHUTTER dial to select
TC/UB/CLOCK menu → HEADER REC menu, and then
press the SHUTTER dial.
HEADER REC menu screen
––– HEADER REC –––
START KEY
TC DATA
STOP+VTR
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
2. Setting the HEADER REC menu screen.
1Select the menu item.
UB DATA
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.
2Changing the setting value.
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
30SEC
30SEC
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.
■ In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA item,
the blinking digit position moves when the SHUTTER dial
is pressed. When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value
of the blinking digit changes. After all the digits have been
set and the SHUTTER dial is pressed, EXECUTE starts
blinking. Press the SHUTTER dial once more to confirm
the set value.
Cursor
Item
Set value
3. To terminate the setting, press the STATUS button.
Executing the HEADER REC Function
■ The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen
should be set to STOP+VTR.
1. Set the MODE switch to CAM mode.
Load the cassette and engage the Record-Standby mode
or the Stop mode.
2. While pressing the STOP button, press the VTR trigger
HEADER REC
button.
● The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning, and
HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of the
tape.
After HEADER REC recording is performed for the
specified duration only, the Record-Standby mode is
engaged automatically.
During HEADER REC
● During HEADER REC recording, “HEADER REC” is
shown (blinking) on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.
MEMO:
3. After HEADER REC recording is completed and the Record-
Standby mode is engaged, normal recording starts when
you press the VTR trigger button.
● When the TC GENE switch is set to either PRESET REC
or REGEN, the time code value at the start of the
recording will be the time code value set on the HEADER
REC menu screen.
To stop during HEADER REC operation, press the VTR
trigger button or the Stop button.
MEMO:
● The time code preset on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording is
performed.
● The user’s bits following completion of HEADER REC
recording will be the user’s bits value set on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.
● The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened during
HEADER REC recording.
● HEADER REC operation is accepted even during loading
of the cassette tape.
● The date and time recorded in the color bar section will be
in accordance with the settings for the DATE REC item on
the TIME/DATE menu screen.
● Date and time data are not written during recording of black
video signals.
● The test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) recorded in the color bar
section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the
TEST TONE item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen.
● The running of the time code following completion of
HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the
setting of the TC GENE switch.
FREE RUN
: Continuous running.
REC RUN or REGEN: Runs only during REC.
59
E
U
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7. SHOOTING OPERATION
7-6 Recording the Color Bars
7-6 Recording the Colour Bars
OUTPUT switch
OUTPUT switch
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
PULL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OPEN
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
AUTO
L
CAM
MANUAL
CAM
MANUAL
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Color bar signal of the built-in signal generator
Whether the camera image should be output or whether the
color bar of the built-in signal generator should be output can
be selected during record-standby and recording.
Colour bar signal of the built-in signal generator
Whether the camera image should be output or whether the
colour bar of the built-in signal generator should be output can
be selected during record-standby and recording.
Compliance with SMPTE standard color bar is output.
Compliance with EBU standard colour bar is output.
■ To output the color bar, set the OUTPUT switch to the
■ To output the colour bar, set the OUTPUT switch to the
BARS side.
BARS side.
White Yellow Cyan
Green Magenta
Red
Blue
■ To output the camera image, set the OUTPUT switch to
■ To output the camera image, set the OUTPUT switch to
the CAM AUTO KNEE ON/OFF side.
the CAM AUTO KNEE ON/OFF side.
MEMO:
MEMO:
● Whether or not the audio reference signal should be
output while the color bar is output can be selected with
the TESTTONE item on theAUDIO/VIDEO menu screen.
● Color bars will not appear when Full Auto is set to ON or
when in the VTR mode.
● Whether or not the audio reference signal should be
output while the colour bar is output can be selected
with the TEST TONE item on the AUDIO menu screen.
● Colour bars will not appear when Full Auto is set to ON
or when in the VTR mode.
Blue
Black Magenta Black
Cyan
Black
White
Black
White
Black
60
E-60
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8-1 Playback Procedure
Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder, or on the LCD monitor, or on the monitor connected to the video output
connector.
BLANK SEARCH REW
STOP
FF
PLAY
STILL
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
FILTER
MONITOR
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
/
Operation cover
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
MODE
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
REW button
FF button
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
BLANK SEARCH REW
STOP
FF
PLAY
STILL
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
Still button
PLAY button
STOP button
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
8-2 Fast-Forward, Rewind
MODE
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
CAM
■ Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the
tape. Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind the
tape.
MEMO:
● When the tape approaches the end during fast forwarding
or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect the
tape.
POWER switch
■ Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewinding.
MODE switch
● The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may
become longer when used in a cold environment. This is
not a malfunction.
MEMO:
MEMO:
● The GY-DV5100 can play back the following three types
of videocassettes:
● In the VTR mode, the camera image is not output on the
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder or through the video output
connector.
● The VTR mode is indicated on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder. (Status screen)
•
•
•
DV videocassette
MiniDV videocassette
DVCAM videocassette
8-3 Search
● Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back.
TC00:00:00:00
20min
■ Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to search
the tape in the forward direction. Playback takes place while
fast forwarding.
■ Press the PLAY button to resume normal playback.
■ Press the STOP button to stop.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
MEMO:
Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in the
reverse direction. Playback takes place while rewinding.
2. Set the unit to the VTR mode.
●
To output sound during the search, set the A.OUT AT
SEARCH item on theAUDIO/VIDEO menu screen to ON.
Press the MODE switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.
● Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indicator
to indicate STOP.
12.2V
PLAY
01/02/03 AM––:––:––
(Each press on the button switches the speed to X5, X9, and
X20.)
● Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may
freeze during the search.
VTR operation mode indication
● When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued
for a while, the unit automatically switches to the tape
protect mode.
Tape protect mode: Drum rotation is stopped in order to
protect the tape.
● Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode.
● When the automatic tracking function is activated at the
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear in
the playback image.
3. Load the recorded videocassette correctly.
Slide the OPEN knob on the top section of the unit to open
the cassette cover. Then insert the videocassette and close
the cover.
● When the videocassette is loaded, the unit enters the
Stop mode.
8-4 Blank Search
BLANK SEARCH button
This function can be used to locate blank portions (unrecorded
portions) on the tape, such as the end of a recording.
1. Engage the stop or still mode.
BLANK SEARCH REW
STOP
FF
PLAY
STILL
● This unit does not allow manual tracking adjustment.
● When playing back a tape that was recorded on another
unit, digital noise may appear during playback.
● Following loading of the tape, the built-in head cleaner
will emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate
a malfunction.
● The data recorded for the date and time or time code on
the tape can be shown on the screen. To enable or disable
the display is selected on the menu screen:
Display of date and time : TIME/DATE menu screen
4. Open the operation cover on the upper section of the unit.
2. Press the BLANK SEARCH button.
Slide the operation cover to the side to open.
● Blank search starts.
When a blank part (unrecorded part) on the tape is
detected, the unit enters the STILLstatus in the VTR mode
and the Standby status in the CAM mode.
Status screen
5. Press the PLAY button.
● Playback starts.
■ To stop blank search, press the STOP button.
6. Press the STILL button to stop playback temporarily.
● The unit enters the still mode.
MEMO:
● “BLANK SEARCH” is indicated on the LCD monitor and
in the viewfinder during blank search. (When the Status
screen is shown.)
● To prevent that images will be missing, overwrite from
about 3 seconds before the point where the previous
recording ends.
7. To re-start playback, press the PLAY button.
BLANK SEARCH
Display of time code
: LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen
8. To stop playback or the still mode, press the STOP button.
12.2V
01/02/03 AM––:––:––
BSRH
Blank search operation indicator
61
62
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8. PLAYBACK MODE
8-5 Variable Slow Playback
8-6 Outputting CH-3, CH-4 Channel Audio
The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels when the 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency is employed. The GY-DV5100
records audio on the two channels CH-1 and CH-2. (4-channel recording is possible in the case of DV input.)
When the GY-DV5100 is used for playback of a tape that was recorded on another unit with audio recorded on the CH-3 and CH-
4 channels, the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen must be set.
EDIT SEARCH
EDIT SEARCH
+ button
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
SHUTTER
MENU
.3
.4
5600K
5600K
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
1
/
64 ND
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
EDIT SEARCH
– button
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
ATUS
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
OPEN
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
5600K 1/8 ND
1
2
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
MODE
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
L
CAM
MANUAL
■ During stop, playback or still playback, slow motion playback
is effected by pressing the EDIT SEARCH + button.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
Pressing the EDIT SEARCH – button effects reverse slow
motion playback.
SHUTTER dial
STATUS button
Variable Slow Playback
VTR indicator
● Playback in FWD direction becomes faster each time
the EDIT SEARCH + button is pressed.
× 0.1 (SLOW+1) → × 0.2 (SLOW+2) → × 0.5 (SLOW+3)
→ × 1 (FWD) → × 0.1 (SLOW+1) ..
● Playback in REV direction becomes faster each time
the EDIT SEARCH – button is pressed.
TOP MENU screen
Setting
––– MENU –––
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
■ Confirm that the GY-DV5100 is in the VTR mode. (VTR
indicator: On)
OTHERS..
× –0.1 (SLOW–1) → × –0.2 (SLOW–2) → × –0.5
(SLOW–3) → × –1 (REV) → × –0.1 (SLOW–1) ..
The characters indicated in parentheses ( ) are shown
on the Status screen.
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
1. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to display
CANCEL
the TOP MENU screen.
*
2. Rotate the SHUTTER to align the cursor ( ) with theAUDIO/
VIDEO menu, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen appears.
■ To return to the normal playback mode, press the PLAY
button.
3. Rotate the SHUTTER to align the cursor ( ) with theAUDIO
SELECT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.
AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen
■ To stop, press the STOP button.
––– AUDIO/VIDEO –––
■ The amount of frames advanced in slow motion playback
can be set in STEP SLOW MODE on page 86.
TEST TONE
AUDIO MODE
ON
32K
4. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting.
A.OUT AT SEARCH ON
CH1 FRONT VR
WIND CUT
ENABLE
BOTH
CH1/2
: To reproduce the sound (CH-1, CH-2)
recorded during shooting.
AUDIO REF.LEVEL –20dB
MIX
: To reproduce the sound recorded during
shooting (CH-1, CH-2) and the after-recorded
sound (on CH-3 and CH-4) simultaneously.
: To reproduce the sound after-recorded on CH-
3 and CH-4.
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO MONITOR
SET UP
CH3/4
MIX
7.5%
PAGE BACK
CH3/4
5. When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the set value is
confirmed.
6. To return to the normal screen, use either of the following
methods.
● Press the STATUS button
or
● Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the EXIT
item before pressing the SHUTTER dial.
MEMO:
After-recording on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels is not
possible.
63
64
E
U
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector
Connecting the GY-DV5100 to another video component equipped with DV I/O connector (IEEE1394 standard) using a DV cable
(optional) enables dubbing of digital signals with high picture quality and high-quality sound.
Connecting the GY-DV5100 to another video component equipped with DV I/O connector (IEEE1394 standard) using a DV cable
(optional) enables dubbing of digital signals with high picture quality and high-quality sound.
* GY-DV5100 is not capable of recording DV signals.
Rear section of GY-DV5100
Rear section of GY-DV5100
Video component with DV Connector
PHONES
DC IN
TALLY
D
V
I
N
T
Video component with DV Connector
DC OUT
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
PHONES
DC IN
TALLY
DV
INT
DV connector
DC OUT
CH-1
CH-2
REAR AUDIO IN
DV connector
DV connector
DV connector
DV cable (VC-VDV204 (4P-4P), VC-VDV206 (4P-6P))
DV cable (VC-VDV204 (4P-4P), VC-VDV206 (4P-6P))
When Using the GY-DV5100 as Playback Unit (Dubbing to Another Video)
When Using the GY-DV5100 as Playback Unit (Dubbing to Another Video)
1. Connect the units with the DV cable.
1. Connect the units with the DV cable.
2. Switch the DV/INT selector switch on the rear of the camera
to DV.
2. Switch the DV/INT selector switch on the rear of the camera
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
to DV.
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
3. Turn ON both units.
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
/
OPEN
SHUTTER
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MODE
FILTER
3200K
MENU
1
2
3. Turn ON both units.
5600K
1
/
8
ND
ND
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
OPEN
1
/64
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
4. Place the GY-DV5100 in the VTR MODE.
CH-1
CH-2
-
C-
STATUS
VTR
II
SHUTTER
MENU
MODE
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
O T
VTR
L
U
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
CAM
MODE
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
Press the MODE switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
4. Place the GY-DV5100 in the VTR MODE.
CAM
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
VTR
MODE
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
L
CAM
N
Press the MODE switch upward to turn on theVTR indicator.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
CAM
5. Insert the videocassettes.
POWER
VTR
GY-DV5100: Insert the recorded videocassette.
Recording unit: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to.
ON
OFF
5. Insert the videocassettes.
GY-DV5100: Insert the recorded videocassette.
Recording unit: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to.
MODE switch
6. Press the PLAY button on the GY-DV5100 to start playback.
INT
DV
MODE switch
6. Press the PLAY button on the GY-DV5100 to start playback.
INT
DV
7. Start recording on the recording unit.
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for
recording.
● Dubbing still images makes the images
coarser. In addition, noise may appear
in the sound.
7. Start recording on the recording unit.
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for recording.
● Dubbing still images makes the images coarser. In addition,
noise may appear in the sound.
8. When dubbing is completed.
8. When dubbing is completed.
Stop recording on the recording unit, and then press the
STOP button on the GY-DV5100 to stop playback.
Stop recording on the recording unit, and then press the
STOP button on the GY-DV5100 to stop playback.
MEMO:
MEMO:
● Turn the camera off before switching DV/INT.
● Turn the camera off before switching DV/INT.
● The operation methods differ with the characteristics and specifications of the connected equipment. Even if connection is
possible, operation or data communication may sometimes be impossible to perform.
● If block noise appears or the sound falls out, try to disconnect and then connect the DV cable again, or turn the power to the
GY-DV5100 off and then on again.
● When connecting to a D-9 (digital-S) component with an IEEE1394 connection, the date and time data are not output from
the D-9 component. Also, the date and time data cannot be recorded on the D-9 component. When making an IEEE1394
connection with a D-9 component, install SA-DV60 on the device.
● The operation methods differ with the characteristics and specifications of the connected equipment. Even if connection is
possible, operation or data communication may sometimes be impossible to perform.
● If block noise appears or the sound falls out, try to disconnect and then connect the DV cable again, or turn the power to the
GY-DV5100 off and then on again.
● When connecting to a D-9 (digital-S) component with an IEEE1394 connection, the date and time data are not output from
the D-9 component. Also, the date and time data cannot be recorded on the D-9 component. When making an IEEE1394
connection with a D-9 component, install SA-DV60 on the device.
● If the power to the component connected to the DV connector is turned on, or the video input is changed, noise may appear
in the audio. When these operations have to be performed, reduce the sound volume of the audio component, speaker, etc.,
connected to the GY-DV5100 to a minimum.
● If the power to the component connected to the DV connector is turned on, or the video input is changed, noise may appear
in the audio.When these operations have to be performed, reduce the sound volume of the audio component, speaker, etc.,
connected to the GY-DV5100 to a minimum.
● When using the TC DUPLICATE mode of BR-DV600A, set Menu No. 416 [NON DROP/DROP] of BR-DV600A according to
the framing mode (Drop/Non-drop) of the tape to be played back on this unit.
● Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the recorder is equipped with a DV terminal.
65
E-65
E
U
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector (Cont’d)
9-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector (Cont’d)
When Using the GY-DV5100 as RECORDING Unit (Dubbing From Another Videocassette)
When Using the GY-DV5101 as RECORDING Unit (Dubbing From Another Videocassette)
1. Switch the DV/INT selector switch on the rear of the camera
1. Switch the DV/INT selector switch on the rear of the camera
to DV.
to DV.
OPEN
2. Turn ON both units.
2. Turn ON both units.
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
FILTER
1
2
.3
.4
3200K
5600K
5600K
5600K
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
/
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
MENU
3. Place the GY-DV5101 in the VTR MODE.
3. Place the GY-DV5100 in the VTR MODE.
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MODE
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MODE
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
Press the MODE switch upward to turn on theVTR indicator.
CH-1
CH-2
Press the MODE switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.
VTR
C
MODE
T
VTR
MODE
II
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
I
VTR
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
NORMAL
SPOT
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
L
CAM
L
CAM
AA
CAM
CAM
4. Insert the videocassettes.
4. Insert the videocassettes.
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
GY-DV5101: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to.
Playback unit: Insert the recorded videocassette.
GY-DV5100: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to.
Playback unit: Insert the recorded videocassette.
5. Connect the units with the DV cable.
5. Connect the units with the DV cable.
MODE switch
Date and time data:
Data transmitted from the playback unit
is recorded.
MODE switch
INT
DV
DV INT
6. Start playback on the playback unit.
Date and time data:
6. Start playback on the playback unit.
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for playback.
● The playback picture from the playback unit appears on
the GY-DV5101’s LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Data transmitted from the playback
unit is recorded.
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for playback.
● The playback picture from the playback unit appears on
the GY-DV5100’s LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Time code:
Time code:
The data generated by the GY-
DV5101’s time code generator is
recorded.
The data generated by the GY-DV5100’s time code generator
7. Press theVTR trigger on the GY-DV5101 to start recording.
■ To temporarily pause the recording, press theVTR trigger.
■ To restart the recording, press the VTR trigger again.
is recorded.
7. Press the VTR trigger on the GY-DV5100 to start recording.
■ To temporarily pause the recording, press the VTR trigger.
■ To restart the recording, press the VTR trigger again.
Time code
Time code
00:00:00:00
TC00:00:00:00
8. When dubbing is completed.
8. When dubbing is completed.
Press the VTR trigger or the STOP button on the
GY-DV5101 to stop recording, and then stop playback on
the playback unit.
Press the VTR trigger or the STOP button on the
GY-DV5100 to stop recording, and then stop playback on
the playback unit.
MEMO:
MEMO:
Depending on the player, sound may not be heard
momentarily from this unit when switching modes from
STILL to PLAY.
Depending on the player, sound may not be heard
momentarily from this unit when switching modes from
STILL to PLAY.
REC
01/02/03 01:23:45
REC
01/02/03 01:23:45
Date and time
Date and time
Backup Recording of the GY-DV5100's Camera Image and Sound Through the DV Connector
Backup Recording of the GY-DV5100’s Camera Image and Sound Through the DV Connector
The GY-DV5100’s camera image and sound can be recorded for backup on another component that is equipped with DV connector.
Recording operation is performed on the backup equipment simultaneously with performance of the recording operations on the
GY-DV5100.
The GY-DV5100’s camera image and sound can be recorded for backup on another component that is equipped with DV connector.
Recording operation is performed on the backup equipment simultaneously with performance of the recording operations on the
GY-DV5100.
Master unit
Master unit
Operation
Operation
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with the operation of the VTR trigger button on the
master unit.
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with start and stop of recording on the master unit.
(Depending on the GY-DV5100 or the backup unit, the image,
audio, and/or time code may deviate from what they should be
at the points where the recording is started or stopped.)
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with the operation of the VTR trigger button on the
master unit.
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with start and stop of recording on the master unit.
(Depending on the GY-DV5100/5101 or the backup unit, the
image, audio, and/or time code may deviate from what they
should be at the points where the recording is started or
stopped.)
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
FILTER
3200K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
2
Backup unit
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
Backup unit
/
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
AUDIO
LEVEL
OPEN
PULL
FRONT
REAR
OPEN
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
F
R
R
E
O
A
NT
R
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1 CH-2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
MODE
A
U
D
I
O
I
N
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
A
U
D
I
O
S
E
L
E
C
T
MODE
VTR
VTR
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
L
A
UT
O
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
L
CAM
MANUAL
DV cable
DV cable
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Signal flow
Signal flow
Connections
Connections
MEMO:
Use the GY-DV5100 as the master unit.
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a DV cable
Use the GY-DV5100 as the master unit.
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a DV cable
MEMO:
● When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER
TO DV” indication is shown on the LCD or in the
viewfinder for 3 seconds.
● When the Backup Recording function of BR-DV600A or
BR-DV3000 is used, the DV REC TRIGGER item on the
GY-DV5100’s OTHERS (1/2) Menu Screen should be
set to OFF.
● If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record
time codes input from the DV IN/OUT terminal (TC
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on
the master side can be recorded.
● When using BR-DV600A as a backup device and
switching GY-DV5100 from the EDIT SEARCH or
PLAYBACK mode to the RECORD mode, noise will be
noticed on the monitor output screen of BR-DV600A
(backup will be correctly recorded).
● When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER
TO DV” indication is shown on the LCD or in the
viewfinder for 3 seconds.
● When the Backup Recording function of BR-DV600A or
BR-DV3000 is used, the DV REC TRIGGER item on the
GY-DV5100’s OTHERS (1/2) Menu Screen should be
set to OFF.
● If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record
time codes input from the DV IN/OUT terminal (TC
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on
the master side can be recorded.
● When using BR-DV600A as a backup device and
switching GY-DV5100 from the EDIT SEARCH or
PLAYBACK mode to the RECORD mode, noise will be
noticed on the monitor output screen of BR-DV600A
(backup will be correctly recorded).
Settings
Settings
■ Master unit (GY-DV5100)
● Place in CAMERA mode.
● Set the DV REC TRIGGER item on the OTHERS (1/2)
Menu Screen to ON.
■ Master unit (GY-DV5100)
● Place in CAMERA mode.
● Set the DV REC TRIGGER item on the OTHERS (1/2)
Menu Screen to ON.
■ Backup unit
■ Backup unit
● Place in DV signal input mode.
Depending on the used component, it may be necessary
to set “REMOTE SELECT”.
● When BR-DV600Aor BR-DV3000 is used, set the Backup
Recording function to OFF.
● Place in DV signal input mode.
Depending on the used component, it may be necessary
to set “REMOTE SELECT”.
● When BR-DV600A or BR-DV3000 is used, set the Backup
Recording function to OFF.
*
*
● Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.
● Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.
66
E-66
E
U
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
The GY-DV5100 records SMPTE-standard time codes and user’s bits. In the play mode or the record mode, the reproduced time
codes or user’s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
The GY-DV5100 records EBU-standard time codes and user’s bits. In the play mode or the record mode, the reproduced time
codes or user’s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
● Time code data cannot be output through the unit’s connectors.
● Time code data cannot be output through the unit’s connectors.
10-1 Displaying Time Code
10-1 Displaying Time Code
The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD monitor
or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as follows.
(Status screen)
The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD monitor
or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as follows.
(Status screen)
COUNTER switch
COUNTER switch
OPEN
OPEN
Setting
Setting
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
PULL
OPEN
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
MONITOR
SELECT
FRONT
REAR
MONITOR
SELECT
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
COUNTER
COUNTER
TC
UB
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-1
1. Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen to
1. Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen to
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
MIX
FRONT
REAR
TC
UB
MIX
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUTO
CH-2
CH-2
MANUAL
MANUAL
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
ON.
ON.
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
CH-1
CH-2
TC GENE.
CH-1
TC GENE.
REGEN
FREE
REC
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
LINE
MIC
+48V
ON OFF
ON OFF
MANUAL
MANUAL
PRST
PRST
● Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the Status
● Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the Status
screen.
screen.
2. Whether time codes or user’s bit data should be displayed
is selected with the COUNTER switch inside the cover on
the side.
2. Whether time codes or user’s bit data should be displayed
is selected with the COUNTER switch inside the cover on
the side.
TC : Time codes are displayed.
UB : User’s bit data is displayed.
Time code indication
Time code indication
Example
Time code indication
00:00:00:00
Example
Time code indication
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
TC : Time codes are displayed.
The symbol between the seconds and the frame
differs with the framing mode. (Colon or dot)
UB : User’s bit data is displayed.
Non-drop frame (:)
Drop frame (.)
User’s bits indication
FF EE DD 20
■ Time code entered from the DV connector
Time code entered from the DV connector
User’s bits indication
FF EE DD 20
Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop
mode displays the time code data or user’s bit data input
from the DV terminal on the Status screen.
DTCG : The time code data from the DV terminal
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the DV terminal
To return to display of the original time code or user’s bit,
press the STOP button.
■ Time code entered from the DV connector
Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop
mode displays the time code data or user’s bit data input
from the DV terminal on the Status screen.
DTCG : The time code data from the DV terminal
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the DV terminal
To return to display of the original time code or user’s bit,
press the STOP button.
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
STBY
01/02/03 01:23:45
Status 1 screen
Status 1 screen
(Display of the normal time code or user’s bit is also restored
by performing VTR operation.)
(Display of the normal time code or user’s bit is also restored
by performing VTR operation.)
MEMO:
● The time code and user’s bit input from the DV terminal
are not recorded. The data generated by the camera’s
time code generator is recorded.
● To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with
the TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when
recording input signal from the DV terminal.
This does not apply to GY-DV5100E.
MEMO:
● The time code and user’s bit input from the DV terminal
are not recorded. The data generated by the camera’s
time code generator is recorded.
● To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with
the TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when
recording input signal from the DV terminal.
67
E-67
E
U
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code
10-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code
The time codes or user’s bit data from the internal time code generator can be recorded at the time of recording scenes.
The time codes from the internal time code generator can be recorded at the time of recording scenes.
Whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded can be selected with the UB REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
To preset the Time Code, make the following settings.
■ TC GENE. switch
To preset the Time Code, make the following settings.
■ TC GENE. switch
Set to PRST REC or PRST FREE.
PRST REC : The data preset in the time code generator
runs only during recording.
Set to PRST REC or PRST FREE.
PRST REC
: The data preset in the time code generator
runs only during recording.
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
Use this setting if it is necessary to record
continual time codes across different scenes.
* However, approximately 1-frame variations
may occur in scene accuracy.
OPEN
MONITOR
SELECT
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
COUNTER
TC
UB
CH-1
MIX
FRONT
REAR
CH-2
Use this setting if it is necessary to record
continual time codes across different
scenes.
OPEN
CH-1
CH-2
MONITOR
SELECT
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
COUNTER
TC
UB
CH-1
AUDIO SELECT
MIX
FRONT
REAR
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
CH-1
CH-2
TC GENE.
CH-2
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
ON OFF
MANUAL
AUDIO
LEVEL
CH-1
CH-2
OPEN
PRST
CH-1
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
AUDIO IN
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO IN
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO SELECT
TC GENE.
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
MANUAL
OPEN
PRST
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
PRST FREE : The time code starts to run from the time it is
preset in the time code generator.
AUDIO IN
*
However, approximately 1-frame
variations may occur in scene accuracy.
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
CH-2
AUTO
MANUAL
TC GENE. switch
PRST FREE : The time code starts to run from the time it
■ TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC GENE. switch
is preset in the time code generator.
Use the DROP/NON DROP item to select the framing mode
for the time code generator.
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
DROP
: The time code generator’s running method is
set to the drop frame mode.
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
Use this setting when placing emphasis on
the recording time.
NON DROP : The time code generator’s running method is
set to the non drop frame mode.
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
ON
UB PRESET
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
Framing mode:
Non-drop/Drop setting
UB REC
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
PAGE BACK
Use this setting when placing emphasis on
the number of frames.
Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode
In the NTSC system, the actual number of frames per 1 second is approximately 29.97 frames, but per time code 30 frames are
processed. To compensate for this difference, the mode called “drop mode” drops frame 00 and 01 for every minute not divisible
by 10.
The “non-drop frame mode” is when no frames are dropped and the actual time shift is neglected.
68
E-68
E
U
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
TIME CODE PRESETTING PROCEDURE
TIME CODE PRESETTING PROCEDURE
The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.
The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.
1. Display the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
1 Press the Status button for 1 second or more to display
the TOP MENU screen.
2 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with
the TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.
1. Display the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
1 Press the Status button for 1 second or more to display
the TOP MENU screen.
2 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with
the TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.
OPEN
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
FILTER
3200K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
1
2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
SHUTTER
MENU
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
PULL
OPEN
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT
REAR
PULL
OPEN
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
MODE
AUDIO IN
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
MODE
AUDIO IN
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
L
VTR
CAM
MANUAL
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
● The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.
● The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.
POWER
VTR
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
2. Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).
1 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with TC
PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The first digit of the time code blinks.
The blinking digit is the one to be set.
2 When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit
changes.
3 When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the
blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.
2. Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).
1 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) withTC
PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The first digit of the time code blinks.
The blinking digit is the one to be set.
2 When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit
changes.
3 When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the
blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.
SHUTTER dial STATUS button
TOP MENU screen
SHUTTER dial STATUS button
TOP MENU screen
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
CANCEL
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
CANCEL
4 Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to
set the desired value for all digits.
4 Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to
set the desired value for all digits.
5 After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to
make EXECUTE blink. The setting values are confirmed
when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.
To cancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the
SHUTTER dial.
5 After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to
make EXECUTE blink.The setting values are confirmed
when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.
To cancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the
SHUTTER dial.
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
ON
3. When all the digits are set.
3. When all the digits are set.
● Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen
or
● Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen
or
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
UB REC
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
● Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial to
return to the TOP MENU screen.
● Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial to
return to the TOP MENU screen.
PAGE BACK
Time code (hour, min, sec, frame)
Time code (hour, min, sec, frame)
PRESETTING USER’S BIT DATA
PRESETTING USER’S BIT DATA
The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting
the time code described above.
The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting
the time code described above.
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
TC PRESET
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
ON
UB PRESET
UB PRESET
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
● The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alphabetic
letters from 0 to F for each digit.
● The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alphabetic
letters from 0 to F for each digit.
UB REC
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
● To record user’s bit data, set the UB REC item to ON.
CAUTION:
PAGE BACK
It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to
“F”. Reading of the data during playback will not be possible
for an all-F setting.
CAUTION:
It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to
“F”. Reading of the data during playback will not be possible
for an all-F setting.
Align the cursor with UB
Align the cursor with UB
Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data
Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data
This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the time
code and the user’s bit data.)
This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the time
code and the user’s bit data.)
1 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
2 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
1 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
2 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
69
E-69
E
U
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10. TIME CODE OPERATION
10-3 RecordingTime Codes in Continuation ofTime Codes Recorded onTape
10-3 RecordingTime Codes in Continuation ofTime Codes Recorded onTape
The GY-DV5100 also incorporates a time code reader. Therefore, when the unit enters record mode from record-standby mode, it
can read the time code data recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation of the existing data. The recorded user’s
bit data are identical to the user’s bit data recorded on tape.
The GY-DV5100 also incorporates a time code reader. Therefore, when the unit enters record mode from record-standby mode, it
can read the time code data recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation of the existing data. The recorded user’s
bit data are identical to the user’s bit data recorded on tape.
● However, approximately 1-frame variations may occur in scene accuracy.
● However, approximately 1-frame variations may occur in scene accuracy.
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as follows before starting recording.
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as follows before starting recording.
Setting
Setting
■ Set the TC GENE switch inside the cover on the side to
REGEN.
■ Set the TC GENE switch inside the cover on the side to
REGEN.
● The time code framing mode automatically becomes the
mode (drop frame or non drop frame) already recorded on
the tape.
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
OPEN
OPEN
MONITOR
SELECT
MONITOR
SELECT
COUNTER
TC
UB
COUNTER
TC
UB
CH-1
CH-1
MIX
FRONT
REAR
MIX
FRONT
REAR
CH-2
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
AUDIO
LEVEL
FRONT MIC +48V
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
REAR
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
CH-1
CH-2
TC GENE.
CH-1
TC GENE.
REGEN
FREE
REC
REGEN
FREE
REC
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUTO
LINE
MIC
+48V
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
ON
OFF
MANUAL
PULL
ON OFF
MANUAL
OPEN
OPEN
PRST
PRST
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
REAR
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUTO
MANUAL
MANUAL
TC GENE switch
TC GENE switch
10-4 Reproducing Time Codes
10-4 Reproducing Time Codes
The GY-DV5100 incorporates a time code reader. During playback, the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is
displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (Status screen)
The GY-DV5100 incorporates a time code reader. During playback, the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is
displayed on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (Status screen)
Setting
Setting
Playback time code indication
Playback time code indication
☞ See “Displaying Time Code” on page 67.
☞ See “Displaying Time Code” on page 67.
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not
be displayed correctly by DV components for general
consumer use, as some of these lack the capability to
display longer time codes.
A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not
be displayed correctly by DV components for general
consumer use, as some of these lack the capability to
display longer time codes.
12.2V
12.2V
PLAY
01/02/03 01:23:45
PLAY
01/02/03 01:23:45
Status screen
Status screen
70
E-70
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-1 Menu Screen Configuration
11-2 Setting Menu Screens
The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below.The menu screen to be set is selected from theTOP
MENU in accordance with the function or purpose.
The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode. The contents of set items are stored in the GY-
DV5100’s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off.
The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents in two types of files (FILE A, FILE B) on the GY-
DV5100.When saving menu setting contents that remain more or less fixed, these are stored in FILE A or FILE B.A saved file (FILE
A or B) can be read out on the FILE MANAGE menu screen.
Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the
viewfinder screen. If the OUTPUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS
(1/2) screen is set to ON, the menu screen can also be viewed
on a monitor connected to the MONITOR OUT or Y/C OUT
connector.
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
/
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
––– CAMERA OPERATION –––
2. Set the mode of the GY-DV5100 with the MODE switch.
SHUTTER
FAW
GAIN L
STEP
NONE
0dB
POWER
VTR
(Camera mode or VTR mode)
CAM
ON
OFF
GAIN M
9dB
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
GAIN H
18dB
30dB
ON
MIDDLE
4:3
3. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer.
LOLUX GAIN
SMOOTH TRANS
SPOT L/BACK L
ASPECT RATIO
PAGE BACK
● The TOP MENU screen appears.
CANCEL
STATUS button
4. Select the menu screen to be set.
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
menu screen to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The selected menu screen appears.
CAMERA OPERATION screen
TOP MENU screen (CAM)
STA
SHUTTER
MENU
––– CAMERA PROCESS –––
MASTER BLACK
DETAIL
––– ADVANCED PROCESS –––
––– SKIN COLOR ADJUST –––
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
MIDDLE
OFF
NORMAL
108%
100%
CINE MODE
COLOR MATRIX
GAMMA
FLARE<MASTER>
FLARE<R>
OFF
STANDARD
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
CAM
DTL.V/H BALANCE
DTL.FREQUENCY
SKIN DTL.DETECT
V.RESOLUTION
WHITE CLIP
KNEE POINT
ADVANCED PROCESS..
PAGE BACK
SHUT-
TER
dial
5. Select the menu item on the menu screen.
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The setting area of the selected item starts blinking, and
the setting can now be made.
FLARE<B>
SKIN COLOR ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
SKIN COLOR DET.
SKIN COLOR RANGE
PAGE BACK
STOP
NORMAL
CAMERA PROCESS screen
ADVANCED PROCESS screen
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen
––– AUDIO/VIDEO –––
––– LCD/VF –––
––– MENU –––
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
MENU screen
Cursor
6. Change the setting.
TEST TONE
OFF
48K
ON
ENABLE
BATTERY INFO
TAPE REMAIN
TC/UB
VOLTAGE
AUDIO MODE
A.OUT AT SEARCH
CH1 FRONT VR
WIND CUT
ON
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and then
press the SHUTTER dial.
ON
AUDIO
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
LCD COLOR
LCD PEAKINGS
PAGE BACK
OFF
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
CANCEL
AUDIO REF.LEVEL
AUDIO SELECT
AUDIO MONITOR
SET UP
–20dB
CH1/2
MIX
● The setting area stops blinking and the setting is entered.
■ To change multiple items, repeat the procedures in steps 5.
and 6. above.
7.5%
VTR
PAGE BACK
AUDIO/VIDEO screen
LCD/VF screen (VTR)
––– LCD/VF(2/2) –––
TOP MENU screen (VTR)
7. Return to the TOP MENU.
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
––– LCD/VF(1/2) –––
––– HEADER REC –––
CANCEL
ZEBRA
F.NO/IRIS IND.
70–80%
OFF
START KEY
TC DATA
DISABLE
00:00:00:00
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
30SEC
BATTERY INFO
TAPE REMAIN
TC/UB
VOLTAGE
ON
CAM
FILTER
ON
ON
OFF
ON
■ To change settings on other menu screens, repeat the
procedures in steps 4. to 7. above.
■ To save the set contents in FILE A or B, select the FILE
MANAGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving
to file. ☞ See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 73.
SAFETY ZONE
CENTER MARK
NEXT PAGE
PAGE BACK
AUDIO
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
UB DATA
LCD COLOR
LCD PEAKINGS
PAGE BACK
BARS TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
30SEC
TOP MENU screen
Setting
Item
LCD/VF screen (2/2)
HEADER REC screen
LCD/VF screen (1/2)
––– CAMERA OPERATION –––
SHUTTER
FAW
GAIN L
GAIN M
STEP
PRESET
6dB
9dB
ALC
30dB
ON
MID
8. To return to the normal screen after completing the settings,
––– TC/UB/CLOCK –––
TC PRESET 00:00:00:00
––– TIME/DATE –––
––– CLOCK ADJUST –––
use either of the following methods.
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DATE REC
ON
DATE(MM/DD/YY)
TIME
08/20/02
09:33
EXECUTE
00 00 00 00
EXECUTE
BARS+CAM
OFF
● Press the STATUS button
or
UB PRESET
PAGE BACK
DISPLAY STYLE
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
SEC DISPLAY
CLOCK ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
24HOUR
ON
GAIN H
DROP/NON DROP DROP
HEADER REC..
TIME/DATE..
PAGE BACK
LOLUX GAIN
SMOOTH TRANS
SPOT L/BACK L
ASPECT RATIO
PAGE BACK
● Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor (
)
with the EXIT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
4:3
TC/UB/CLOCK screen
TIME/DATE screen
––– OTHERS(2/2) –––
CLOCK ADJUST screen
––– OTHERS(1/2) –––
CAMERA OPERATION MENU screen
ALARM VR LEVEL
BATTERY TYPE
FRONT TALLY
BACK TALLY
HIGH
OUTPUT CHAR.
DV REC TRIGGER
LONG PAUSE TIME
REM FF/REW MODE
STEP SLOW MODE
NEXT PAGE
OFF
OFF
5MIN
FF/REW
FRAME
14.4V
BLINK
BLINK
PAGE BACK
PAGE BACK
DRUM HOUR
00200
OTHERS screen
OTHERS screen
––– FILE MANAGE –––
LOAD FILE
LOAD
STORE FILE
STORE
RESET FILE
RESET
A
CANCEL
A
CANCEL
A
CANCEL
PAGE BACK
FILE MANAGE screen
71
72
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-3 FILE MANAGE Menu Screen
11-4 TOP MENU Screen
The FILE MANAGE menu screen is used to perform the following tasks.
● Storing menu setting contents in two types of files (A, B).
Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether the GY-DV5100 is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode. In the
VTR mode, the CAMERA OPERATION and CAMERA PROCESS menu screens are not displayed.
When saving menu setting contents that remain more or less fixed, these are stored in A or B.
● Reading out a stored file (A, B, or current settings).
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
● Resetting menu setting contents to the factory settings.
CAMERA
OPERATION
Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting.
● This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.
–––––
–––––
■ Display the FILE MANAGE menu screen.
––– FILE MANAGE –––
Select the FILE MANAGE item on the TOP MENU screen,
and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The FILE MANAGE menu screen appears.
LOAD FILE
LOAD
STORE FILE
STORE
RESET FILE
RESET
A
CAMERA
PROCESS
Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera
image. The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen and SKIN COLOR
ADJUST screen can be displayed through the CAMERAPROCESS menu
screen.
–––––
–––––
CANCEL
A
CANCEL
A
Storing Setting Values
CANCEL
● This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.
PAGE BACK
1. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
STORE FILE, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The area for setting the file name starts blinking.
AUDIO/VIDEO Displays a menu screen related to audio and video.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
LCD/VF
Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the
FILE MANAGE menu screen
2. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select the storage destination
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder, and for adjustments of the picture quality
of LCD monitor. It consists of two screens.
file (A or B), and then press the SHUTTER dial.
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
STORE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The CANCEL indicator in the setting value area blinks.
TC/UB/
CLOCK
Displays a menu screen for setting the time code, user’s bit data, date and
time.
The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display
style are set here. The TIME/DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST
screen can be displayed through the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
–––––
–––––
4. When you rotate the SHUTTER dial to make EXECUTE in
the setting value area blink and then press the SHUTTER
dial, the menu settings are stored in the specified file.
● When the LOAD, STORE, RESET items are set to CANCEL,
none of the operations are executed.
● To close the FILE MANAGE menu screen:
Align the cursor ( ) with the PAGE BACK item, and then press
the SHUTTER dial.
OTHERS
Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour
meter. It consists of two screens.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
Reading Out a Menu Settings File
Or, press the STATUS button.
FILE
MANAGE
Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen.
1. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
LOAD FILE, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The area for setting the file name starts blinking.
The menu screen setting contents can be stored in the GY-DV5100 in
files (FILE A or B), and the menu screen settings stored in files can be
read out. The menu screen setting contents can also be reset to the initial
setting values. (Individual files.)
MEMO:
The currently set value is not reset even when A or B is
reset.
To reset also the currently set value, select “CURRENT”.
2. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select the file where the setting
values are stored (A or B), and then press the SHUTTER
dial.
☞ See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 73.
MENU ALL
RESET
Selects whether the menu screen settings should be reset to the initial CANCEL
CANCEL
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
LOAD item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The CANCEL indicator in the setting value area blinks.
setting values.
EXECUTE
If reset operation is performed, the power is automatically turned off and
then on again. The Camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset.
CANCEL: Reset not performed
4. When you rotate the SHUTTER dial to make EXECUTE in
the setting value area blink and then press the SHUTTER
dial, the menu settings stored in the specified storage
location are read out.
EXECUTE: Reset
EXIT
The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the
cursor is aligned with this item.
–––––
–––––
The power is automatically turned OFF and ON again.
Resetting the Menu Settings to the Factory
Settings.
1. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
RESET FILE, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The area for setting the file name starts blinking.
2. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select the name of the file to
be reset, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
A, B CURRENT: Currently set values
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with the
RESET item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The CANCEL indicator in the setting value area blinks.
4. When you rotate the SHUTTER dial to make EXECUTE in
the setting value area blink and then press the SHUTTER
dial, the set values are reset.
The power is automatically turned OFF and ON again.
73
74
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-5 CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen
11-6 CAMERA PROCESS MENU Screen
The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
SHUTTER
The SHUTTER button on the right side section is used to select STEP for STEP
fixed shutter speed or V.SCAN variable scanning rate for shooting computer VARIABLE
monitor screens.
STEP
MASTER
BLACK
Adjusts the pedestal level (master black), which is the reference of black. MAX (10)
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
MIDDLE
● To increase the pedestal level ..... Increase the number. (UP)
9
● To decrease the pedestal level.... Decrease the number. (DOWN)
to
STEP
:Enables setting of different fixed shutter speeds. [1/7.5, 1/
15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000,
1/10000]
NORMAL (0)
to
–9
VARIABLE :Selected when shooting computer monitor screens, etc.
[Variable range: 60.1 to 2084.6 Hz]
MIN (–10)
DETAIL
Adjusts the detail enhancement level.
MAX (10)
FAW
Selects the W.BAL switch ( on page 14) position to which the FAW NONE
NONE
● To sharpen details ....................... Increase the number. (UP)
● To soften details .......................... Decrease the number. (DOWN)
9
%
(Full-Time Auto White Balance Adjustment) function is to be assigned.
A
to
NONE
:FAW function is not used.
B
NORMAL (0)
to
–9
Note:
A
B
:FAW is assigned to the A position.
:FAW is assigned to the B position.
PRESET
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
PRESET :FAW is assigned to the PRESET position.
MIN (–10)
GAIN L
GAIN M
GAIN H
Selects the gain value in each position of the GAIN switch ( on page –3dB
L: 0dB
M: 9dB
H: 18dB
DTL. V/H
BALANCE
Sets the direction, horizontal (H) or vertical (V), in which stronger detail H-MAX (5)
#
14).
0dB
3dB
enhancement is applied.
4
To strengthen the H enhancement......Increase the number (UP).
To strengthen the V enhancement ......Decrease the number (DOWN).
to
6dB
9dB
12dB
15dB
18dB
ALC
NORMAL (0)
to
–4
H-MIN (–5)
Note:
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
DTL.
FREQUENCY
Varies the detail enhancement level by changing the detail
enhancement frequency.
Set in accordance with the subject.
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
LOLUX GAIN
Sets the gain up value when in the LOLUX mode.
(SS: Shutter speed 1/30)
24dB
24dB+SS
30dB
30dB
OFF
LOW ------ Lowers the frequency for contour highlight.
Use this when shooting objects with large patterns.
MIDDLE --- Sets the frequency for contour highlight to standard.
HIGH ------ Increases the frequency for contour highlight.
Use this when shooting objects with fine patterns.
30dB+SS
36dB
36dB+SS
Note:
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
SMOOTH
TRANS
Smoothens the transition when the GAIN switch ( on page 14), or ON
#
WHT.BAL switch ( on page 14) is switched over and achieves gradual OFF
%
change in place of sudden change.
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching
the GAIN switch set in ALC, FAS button and the LOLUX button.
ON :Activates the smooth transition function.
OFF :Deactivates the smooth transition function.
SPOT L/
BACK L
Sets the level of auto iris when setting theAUTO IRIS switch to BACK L or LOW
MIDDLE
SPOT L.
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
: Lowers the iris level.
MIDDLE : Opens/Closes the iris by 1 step from the standard state.
HIGH : Raises the iris level.
ASPECT
RATIO
Sets the image size of the video signal.
4:3
LETTER
SQUEEZE
4:3
4:3
:4:3 aspect ratio image output.
LETTER
:LETTER BOX (16:9 aspect ratio) image output.
SQUEEZE :SQUEEZE: Images in aspect ratio 16:9 are displayed in
aspect ratio 4:3.
● When setting DATE REC in the TIME/DATE menu screen to BARS or
BARS+CAM, the screen size will be fixed at an aspect ratio of 4:3.
● When ASPECT RATIO is set to LETTER or SQUEEZE, 16:9 aspect
ratio distinction ID signal is outputted from the Y/C OUT terminal.
PAGE BACK
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the
cursor at this position.
–––––
–––––
75
76
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-7 ADVANCED PROCESS Screen
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
CINE MODE
When set to ON, produces gamma curve close to the picture characteristics OFF
OFF
of movies. ON
SKIN DTL
DETECT
Sets the Skin Detail function to ON or OFF.
ON : Skin Detail function activated.
OFF : Skin Detail function not activated.
☞ See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 95.
ON
OFF
COLOR
MATRIX
Used to set the color matrix. When set to ON, color reproduction becomes OFF
STANDARD
OFF
good. However, noise will increase.
5 types of color matrix functions are provided.
OFF : The function is OFF
STANDARD : Standard colour matrix
WARM : Colour adjustment with red tinge
EXTRA 1 to 3 : To set a color matrix other that those described above.
Select the desired option.
STANDARD
WARM
EXTRA1
EXTRA2
EXTRA3
V.RESOLUTION Increases the vertical resolution.
● NORMAL : Vertical resolution of approx. 380 lines.
NORMAL
V.MAX
NORMAL
● V.MAX
: Vertical resolution of approx. 450 lines.
Note:
Note:
When CINE MODE is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
In the case of “V.MAX”, colours may be found on the brighter portions
of the object depending on its color temperature.
GAMMA
Compensates for the gamma curve that determines the reproducibility of MAX (5)
NORMAL
black color.
4
● To enhance the black color reproducibility. However, halftones will be
lost for white section
to
WHITE CLIP
Sets the point where white clipping is to take place for an input video 108%
signal with a high luminance level.
108% : The luminance level is white-clipped at the point of 108%.
100% : The luminance level is white-clipped at the point of 100%. If the
screen appears too white even with the point set at 108%, set the
point at 100%.
108%
100%
NORMAL (0)
100%
............... Increase the number
● When reproducibility of the black color is not so important
............... Decrease the number
Note:
to
–4
MIN (–5)
OFF
When CINE MODE is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
KNEE
POINT
Sets the knee point (brightness level) when the AUTO KNEE function is 100%
FLARE
<MASTER>
For correcting the entire black level when the flare phenomenon in which MAX (10)
NORMAL
light entering the lens is diffused and results in reflection that colors the
black portions of the image occurs.
To raise the entire black level...Increase the number
To lessen the entire black level...Decrease the number
Note:
9
set to OFF.
95%
90%
85%
80%
to
NORMAL
to
–9
MIN (–10)
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
ADVANCED
PROCESS
Displays the ADVANCED PROCESS Screen.
☞ See “ADVANCED PROCESS Screen” on page 78.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
FLARE <R>
FLARE <B>
For correcting the black level of Rch when the flare phenomenon in which
light entering the lens is diffused and results in reflection that colors the
black portions of the image occurs.
To weaken tinge of red ... Increase the number
To strengthen tinge of red ... Decrease the number
Note:
PAGE BACK
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the
cursor at this position.
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
For correcting the black level of Bch when the flare phenomenon in which
light entering the lens is diffused and results in reflection that colors the
black portions of the image occurs.
To weaken tinge of blue ... Increase the number
To strengthen tinge of blue ... Decrease the number
Note:
When LOLUX is ON, “FIX” is displayed and setting is not possible.
SKIN COLOR
ADJUST
Pressing the SHUTTER dial once when the cursor is at this position
switches the screen to display the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen.
PAGE BACK
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial
is pressed with the cursor at this position.
77
78
11. MENU SCREENS
11-8 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Screen
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
SKIN COLOR
DET.
STOP
EXECUTE
STOP
Sets whether it is possible to change the color used by the Skin Tone
Detail function.
EXECUTE : Choose this setting to allow detection of the color used by
the Skin Tone Detail function.
STOP
: Choose this setting to stop detection of the color used by the
Skin Tone Detail function.
☞ See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 95.
The setting of this item can only be changed when the SKIN COLOR
DET. item is set to EXECUTE.
SKIN COLOR
RANGE
WIDE
NORMAL
11
to
This setting is for adjusting the skin color range where Skin Tone Detail
functions. (When this item is selected, the area where the Skin Tone Detail
function is applicable is indicated by zebra patterns on the screen.)
While viewing the zebra pattern range, perform the adjustment.
Increasing the range ........ Increase the number
NORMAL
to
–11
NARROW
Increasing the range ........ Decrease the number
PAGE BACK
The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen returns when the SHUTTER
dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.
–––––
–––––
11-9 AUDIO/VIDEO Menu Screen
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Sets whether or not the audio reference signal (1kHz, –20dBFS or
–12dBFS) should be output while the color bar is output.
OFF : Audio reference signal is not output.
TEST TONE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON : Audio reference signal is output.
Selects the sampling frequency for audio recording (both CH-1 and CH-
2)
AUDIO MODE
32K
48K
48K
32K : Recording is performed with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency
48K : Recording is performed with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling frequency
* The DV format offers recording tracks for up to 4 channel when using
12-bit, 32 kHz sampling. The GY-DV5100 records two of these track.
The GY-DV5100 does not allow after-recording.
Selects whether or not audio should be output during search.
OFF : Audio is not output
A.OUT
AT SEARCH
OFF
ON
ON
ON : Audio is output
Used to select whether or not the front section audio level control should
be operative. The front section audio level control only affects the audio
signal recorded on CH-1.
CH1 FRONT
VR
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE : Use of the front section audio level control is disabled.
ENABLE : Use of the front section audio level control is enabled.
* The operation of the CH-1 audio level control on the side section is
unaffected by this setting.
To select whether or not the low frequencies of the audio signal from the
audio input connectors are cut. Set to ON to reduce the wind noise of the
microphone.
WIND CUT
OFF
OFF
FRONT
REAR CH1
REAR CH2
ALL
OFF
: Low frequencies are not cut.
FRONT
: Only the low frequencies of the audio signal input to the
FRONT MIC IN connector are cut.
REAR CH1: Only the low frequencies of the audio signal input to the
CH-1 REAR AUDIO IN connector are cut.
REAR CH2: Only the low frequencies of the audio signal input to the
CH-2 REAR AUDIO IN connector are cut.
ALL
: The low frequencies are cut for both the FRONT and REAR
AUDIO IN connectors.
79
E
U
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-9 AUDIO/VIDEO Menu Screen (Cont’d)
11-9 AUDIO Menu Screen (Cont’d)
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
AUDIO REF.
LEVEL
Sets the reference audio level of the tape (both CH-1 and CH-2).
–20dB : Records with –20 dB as the reference audio level.
–12dB : Records with –12 dB as the reference audio level. Use this setting
when playing back the tape using DV equipment for general
consumer use.
–20dB
–12dB
–20dB
AUDIO REF.
LEVEL
Sets the reference audio level of the tape (both CH-1 and CH-2).
–20dB : Records with –20 dB as the reference audio level.
–12dB : Records with –12 dB as the reference audio level. Use this setting
when playing back the tape using DV equipment for general
consumer use.
–20dB
–12dB
–20dB
* Use the same setting for playback as for recording.
* This setting is unrelated to the audio level of the IEEE 1394 signal.
* Use the same setting for playback as for recording.
* This setting is unrelated to the audio level of the DV signal.
(GY-DV5101 only)
AUDIO
SELECT
Used to select which channels to reproduce when playing back a tape CH1/2
with sound recorded on 4 channels. (Can only be set in the VTR mode.) MIX
CH1/2 : To reproduce the sound recorded on CH-1 and CH-2.
The GY-DV5100 records audio on the CH-1 and CH-2 channels
during shooting.
CH1/2
AUDIO
SELECT
Used to select which channels to reproduce when playing back a tape CH1/2
with sound recorded on 4 channels. (Can only be set in the VTR mode.) MIX
CH1/2 : To reproduce the sound recorded on CH-1 and CH-2.
The GY-DV5100 records audio on the CH-1 and CH-2 channels
during shooting.
CH1/2
CH3/4
CH3/4
MIX
: To simultaneously reproduce the sound of all four channels.
CH3/4 : To reproduce the sound of the CH-3 and CH-4 channels.
MIX
: To simultaneously reproduce the sound of all four channels.
CH3/4 : To reproduce the sound of the CH-3 and CH-4 channels.
MEMO:
The GY-DV5100 does not allow after-recording on the CH-3 and CH-
4 channels.
MEMO:
The GY-DV5100 does not allow after-recording on the CH-3 and
CH-4 channels.
AUDIO
MONITOR
Selects whether stereo sound or mixed sound is output from the PHONES STEREO
MIX
jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set to MIX.
STEREO : Stereo sound
MIX
AUDIO
MONITOR
Selects whether stereo sound or mixed sound is output from the PHONES STEREO
MIX
jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set to MIX.
STEREO : Stereo sound (CH-1 audio is output from L, CH-2 audio is
output from R)
MIX
(CH-1 audio is output from L, CH-2 audio is output from R)
* Only audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring loudspeaker.
MIX
: Mixed sound
(The mixed CH-1 and CH-2 audio is output from L and R)
* Only audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring loudspeaker.
MIX
: Mixed sound (The mixed CH-1 and CH-2 audio is output
from L and R)
SET UP
Selects whether the camera image or VTR playback image should be 0.0%
7.5%
provided with the setup signal.
7.5%
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while
the cursor is at this position.
PAGE BACK
–––––
–––––
* Setup signal can be selected even for IEEE1394 signal input.
0.0% : Setup signal is not attached to the recording/playback signal.
7.5% : Setup signal is attached to the recording/playback signal.
PAGE BACK
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while
the cursor is at this position.
–––––
–––––
80
E-80
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-10 LCD/VF Menu Screen
11-10 LCD/VF Menu Screen (Cont’d)
The LCD/VF menu screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)
■ LCD/VF (2/2) Menu Screen
■ LCD/VF (1/2) Menu Screen
Settings can be made on the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen only in the Camera mode.
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
BATTERY
INFO
Selects whether the remaining battery level should be shown in minutes VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
Item
ZEBRA
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
[min], percentage [%] or voltage [V] in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
VOLTAGE : Indicates battery voltage in 0.1 V steps.
TIME
CAPA%
Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra 70-80%
pattern is displayed. 85-95%
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance OVER 95%
70-80%
TIME
CAPA%
:
:
Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min].
Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%].
70-80%
changes as shown below according to the remaining battery level.
levels between 70% and 80%.
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance
levels between 85% and 95%.
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance
levels over 95%.
OVER 100%
: 50% or more
: 10% to less than 50%
: 10% or less
85-95%
MEMO:
OVER 95%
●
When remaining battery level is set to TIME or CAPA%, “ RES”
is shown when battery level becomes less than 10%.
Remaining battery levels in [min] and [%] can be selected when
an Anton-Bauer Battery Holder (QR JVC DIGI) is attached.
Remaining battery level is shown automatically in [V] when using
other battery holders.
OVER 100% : Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance
levels over 100%.
●
F.NO/
IRIS IND.
Selects whether or not the F-number of the lens iris/iris level mark is OFF
displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. F.NO
OFF
●
When remaining battery level is set to TIME or CAPA% and
information from the battery is not correct (calibration required),
the display switches between voltage [V] and “ CAL” every 2
seconds.
(Status 1 screen)
OFF
F.NO
F.NO+IND.
: F-number and iris level mark is not displayed.
: F-number is displayed.
F.NO+IND. : F-number and iris level mark is displayed.
TAPE
REMAIN
Selects whether or not the remaining tape time (minutes) is shown in the OFF
ON
FILTER
Selects whether or not the FILTER position of the unit is displayed in the OFF
status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (Status 1 screen) ON
OFF : FILTER position is not displayed.
OFF
OFF
status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
(Camera mode: Status 1 screen, VTR mode: Status screen)
OFF : Not displayed.
ON
ON : FILTER position is displayed.
ON : Displayed.
SAFETY
ZONE
Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in OFF
TC/UB
Selects whether or not the time code or user’s bits data should be shown OFF
OFF
the viewfinder together with the form of the safety zone indication.
OFF : Not displayed
NORMAL : 4:3 zone is displayed.
16:9 : 16:9 zone is displayed.
NORMAL
16:9
in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
(Camera mode: Status 1 screen, VTR mode: Status screen)
OFF : Not displayed.
ON
ON : Displayed.
* Whether the time code or user’s bits data is shown is selected with the
COUNTER switch.
CENTER
MARK
Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safty zone is ON
ON
displayed.
OFF
ON : Center mark is displayed.
OFF : Center mark is not displayed.
AUDIO
Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status OFF
OFF
display on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.
(Camera mode: Status 1 screen, VTR mode: Status screen)
OFF : Not displayed.
ON
CAUTION:
When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and
this item cannot be selected.
ON : Displayed.
LCD COLOR
Adjusts the color saturation of the LCD monitor.
MAX (5)
4
to
NORMAL
to
–4
NORMAL
NEXT PAGE
PAGE BACK
–––––
–––––
–––––
To display the LCD/VF (2/2) menu screen, align the cursor with this item
and then press the SHUTTER dial.
–––––
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while
the cursor is at this position.
MIN (–5)
LCD
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor.
MAX (5)
NORMAL
PEAKING
4
to
NORMAL
to
–4
MIN (–5)
PAGE BACK
To return to the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen, align the cursor with this
position and then press the SHUTTER dial.
–––––
–––––
81
82
E
U
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-11 TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen
11-11 TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen
Time codes and user’s bits can be set on this screen. Date and time is set on the screen that can be reached from this screen.
Time codes and user’s bits can be set on this screen. Date and time is set on the screen that can be reached from this screen.
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
TC PRESET
To preset the time code, align the cursor with this position and then press EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
DROP
TC PRESET
To preset the time code, align the cursor with this position and then press EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
ON
the SHUTTER dial.
CANCEL
ZERO
PRESET
the SHUTTER dial.
CANCEL
EXECUTE
CANCEL
: The set time code is confirmed.
: The set time code is cancelled.
EXECUTE
CANCEL
: The set time code is confirmed.
: The set time code is cancelled.
ZERO PRESET
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to zero (0).
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to zero (0).
UB PRESET
To preset the user’s bit data, align the cursor with this position and then EXECUTE
UB PRESET
UB REC
To preset the user’s bit data, align the cursor with this position and then EXECUTE
press the SHUTTER dial.
CANCEL
ZERO
PRESET
press the SHUTTER dial.
CANCEL
EXECUTE
CANCEL
: The set user’s bit data are confirmed.
: The set user’s bit data are cancelled.
EXECUTE
CANCEL
: The set user’s bit data are confirmed.
: The set user’s bit data are cancelled.
ZERO PRESET
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to zero (0).
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to zero (0).
DROP/
To select the time code generator’s framing mode as either drop or non- DROP
To select whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded.
ON
NON DROP
drop mode.
DROP
NON DROP
To select whether the user’s bits should be displayed during playback of a OFF
tape with recorded user’s bits data.
ON : User’s bits are recorded during recording.
User’s bits are displayed during playback.
: The internal time code generator runs in drop mode.
Choose this setting when emphasizing the recorded
time.
NON DROP
: The internal time code generator runs in non drop mode.
Choose this setting when emphasizing the frame
number.
OFF : User’s bits are not recorded during recording.
User’s bits are not displayed during playback.
HEADER REC To make settings related to the HEADER REC function, align the cursor
with this position, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
HEADER REC To make settings related to the HEADER REC function, align the cursor
with this position, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
☞ See “HEADER REC Menu Screen” on page 84.
☞ See “HEADER REC Menu Screen” on page 84.
TIME/DATE
PAGE BACK
To make settings related to the date and time, align the cursor with this
position and then press the SHUTTER dial.
☞ See “TIME/DATE Menu Screen” on page 85.
TIME/DATE
PAGE BACK
To make settings related to the date and time, align the cursor with this
position and then press the SHUTTER dial.
☞ See “TIME/DATE Menu Screen” on page 85.
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the
cursor is at this position.
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the
cursor is at this position.
83
E-83
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-13 TIME/DATE Menu Screen
11-12 HEADER REC Menu Screen
The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function. (☞ page 58)
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
DISPLAY
Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the OFF
OFF
START KEY
Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when
the VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed.
STOP+VTR : HEADER REC operation is executed.
STOP+VTR
DISABLE
DISABLE
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
ON
OFF: Not displayed.
ON : Displayed.
DISABLE : HEADER REC operation is not executed.
● When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back, there will
be no display of time and date even when this item is set to ON.
● To display the date and time recorded on the tape, set the DATE REC
item to OFF. When the DATE REC item is set to BARS or BARS+CAM,
the date and time recorded on the tape are not displayed even if this
item is set to ON.
TC DATA
Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode
is engaged following completion of HEADER REC.
EXECUTE
ZERO
PRESET
CANCEL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
: Confirms the set time code.
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to zero (0).
DISPLAY
MODE
In the Camera mode, the date and time are displayed in accordance with BARS+CAM
the following settings. In the VTR mode, if the DATE REC item is set to BARS
OFF, the date and time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance CAM
with the following settings.
BARS+CAM
CANCEL
: Clears the set time code.
The Frame mode will in accordance with the setting of the DROP/NON
DROP item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is
engaged may differ some frames from the value set for this item.
BARS+CAM: Date and time are always displayed.
BARS
: Date and time are displayed when the OUTPUT switch on
the side section is set to BARS.
: Date and time are displayed when the OUTPUT switch on
the side section is set to CAM.
CAM
UB DATA
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.
EXECUTE
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to zero (0).
EXECUTE
ZERO
PRESET
CANCEL
EXECUTE
: Confirms the set user’s bits.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
DATE REC
Selects whether date and time are to be recorded on the tape as video OFF
OFF
CANCEL
MEMO:
: Clears the set user’s bits.
data or not, as well as the video mode in case of recording.
Recording is done according to the set position of the OUTPUT switch at BARS+CAM
the side panel.
BARS
OFF : Date and time data are not recorded.
The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/
UB/CLOCK menu screen.
BARS: Date and time data are recorded when color bars are output.
BARS+CAM: Date and time data are recorded when color bars and camera
image are output.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
With setting to BARS or BARS+CAM, the screen size is fixed to 4:3.
BARS TIME
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone
(1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)
0 SEC
to
99 SEC
30 SEC
30 SEC
DISPLAY
STYLE
Selects the style for the date and time display.
DATE+TIME: Date and time are displayed.
DATE: Date only is displayed.
TIME : Time only is displayed.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
DATE+TIME
DATE
DATE+TIME
MM/DD/YY
TIME
BLACK TIME
PAGE BACK
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during 0 SEC
HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)
to
99 SEC
DATE STYLE
TIME STYLE
Selects the style for the date display.
YY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is
pressed.
YY/MM/DD: Displayed in the format of year/month/date.
MM/DD/YY: Displayed in the format of month/date/year.
DD/MM/YY: Displayed in the format of date/month/year.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
–––––
–––––
Selects the style for the time display.
24 HOUR
12 HOUR
24 HOUR
24 HOUR: Displays the time using the 24-hour system.
12 HOUR: Displays the time using the 12-hour system.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
SEC DISPLAY Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display.
OFF:Seconds are not displayed.
OFF
ON
ON
ON :Seconds are displayed.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item
cannot be selected.
CLOCK
To adjust the date and time, align the cursor with this position and then
press the SHUTTER dial.
The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen. For the setting
method, see “Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date and Time” on
page 43.
–––––
–––––
–––––
–––––
ADJUST
PAGE BACK
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed
while the cursor is at this position.
84
85
11. MENU SCREENS
11. MENU SCREENS
11-14 OTHERS Menu Screen
The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)
■ OTHERS (2/2) Menu Screen
■ OTHERS (1/2) Menu Screen
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
Item
Function
Variation Range Initial Setting
OUTPUT
CHAR.
Selects whether characters should be displayed on the screen of a monitor OFF
OFF
ALARM VR
LEVEL
Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the OFF
alarm sound. LOW
The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the MIDDLE
MIDDLE
connected to MONITOR OUT connector or Y/C OUT connector.
OFF : No on-screen-display
ON
ON : On-screen-display
PHONES jack.
HIGH
OFF
LOW
: Sound is not output.
: Alarm sound is soft.
ON
DV REC
TRIGGER
Selects whether or not the VTR trigger command should be output through OFF
the DV connector. Set to ON when the GY-DV5100's DV signal should be ON
recorded on another component for backup.
MIDDLE : Alarm sound is normal.
HIGH : Alarm sound is loud.
OFF : VTR trigger command is not output.
ON : VTR trigger command is output.
* Set this item to OFF, when the Backup Recording function of BR-DV600A
or BR-DV3000 is used.
BATTERY
TYPE
To be set in accordance with the used battery back type.
12V
14.4V
12V
: Choose this setting when using 12 V battery (12VDC Flat shape 13.2V
type). 14.4V
13.2V : Choose this setting when using 13.2 V battery (Anton-Bauer
Trimpack 13, Propack 13, Magnum 13, Compack 13).
14.4V : Choose this setting when using 14.4 V battery (Anton-Bauer
DIONIC 90, Trimpack 14, Propack 14, Magnum 14, Compack
14).
5MIN
LONG PAUSE Selects the time (minutes) before the tape protect mode (drum head 3MIN
TIME
rotation stopped) is engaged when the record-standby condition continues. 5MIN
3MIN : 3 minutes
5MIN : 5 minutes
* When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status
continues, the setting will be 3 minutes or less regardless of the setting
on the menu.
● If this setting is wrong or neglected, the unit’s display of remaining
battery power and generation of battery alarm will not work correctly.
● This setting is valid when a battery pack is used. It is invalid when a
DC power supply is used.
FF/REW
REM FF/REW
MODE
Selects the operation when the FF or REW command is received when FF/REW
the GY-DV5100 is remote controlled using a non-linear editing controller. SEARCH
FF/REW : Fast forward or rewinding is executed. Normally, this setting
is used.
SEARCH : FWD search or REV search is executed.
Use this setting when detection of the beginning of programs
(cue-up) works less than satisfactorily when this item is set
to FF/REW.
FRONT TALLY Selects the lighting method of the TALLY lamp in the viewfinder during BLINK
recording. This setting is valid when the viewfinder’s TALLY switch is set to ON
ON.
BLINK
BLINK
BLINK : The lamp blinks from when the VTR trigger is pressed and until
recording starts. The lamp lights steadily during recording.
ON
: The lamp lights only during recording.
FRAME
STEP SLOW
MODE
Selects the amount of frames advanced in the STILL mode.
(Frame advance is only available with an external remote control signal.) FRAME
FIELD : Field-by-field frame advance.
FIELD
BACK TALLY
Selects the lighting method of the TALLY lamp on the rear section during OFF
recording.
OFF : The lamp is always off.
BLINK
ON
FRAME : Frame-by-frame frame advance.
BLINK : The lamp blinks from when the VTR trigger is pressed and until
recording starts. The lamp lights steadily during recording.
–––––
NEXT PAGE
PAGE BACK
To display the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen, align the cursor with this item
and then press the SHUTTER dial.
–––––
ON
: The lamp lights only during recording.
–––––
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while
the cursor is at this position.
–––––
PAGE BACK
DRUM HOUR
The OTHERS (1/2) menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is
pressed while the cursor is at this position.
–––––
–––––
–––––
Displays the accumulated time that the drum has been in operation. To be
used as a yardstick for periodical maintenance.
–––––
The cursor ( ) cannot be moved to this item.
86
87
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12-2 IRIS (Brightness) Adjustment
12-1 Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW)
The FAW function adjusts the white balance
value automatically as the lighting condition
changes.
––– CAMERA OPERATION –––
The lens iris can be adjusted using any of the
following three methods.
ADJUSTMENT OF LENS IRIS
SHUTTER
FAW
STEP
A
GAIN L
GAIN M
0dB
6dB
● Automatic adjustment
Iris ring
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and
out of places under different lighting conditions.
Set the iris mode switch to “A” (Auto).
The iris is adjusted automatically according to the brightness
of the object.
GAIN H
9dB
LOLUX GAIN
SMOOTH TRANS
SPOT L/BACK L
ASPECT RATIO
PAGE BACK
30dB
OFF
MIDDLE
4:3
● Manual adjustment
Set the iris mode switch to “M” (Manual).
The iris can be adjusted manually by rotating the iris ring.
Setting procedure
The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on the
CAMERA OPERATION menu.
This item allows allocation of the FAW function to one of the
WHT.BAL switch positions, A, B or PRST.
☞ See “CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen” on page 75.
● Temporary auto iris adjustment
During manual iris adjustment, the auto iris adjustment mode
is activated only while this temporary auto iris button is held
depressed.
RET
M
A
W
T
CAUTION:
Ⅲ Changing the auto iris adjustment setup
Temporary auto iris
button
The FAW (Full-time Auto White balance) function cannot
provide optimum white balance with a subject outside the
FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains only
a single color or not enough white color.
Under special lighting conditions such as backlight, it is often
appropriate to change the value set by the auto iris
adjustment.
This can be done by the following method.
● Setting the AUTO IRIS LEVEL switch of the camera
☞ See “SWITCH FUNCTIONS” on page 93.
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5
6
0
0
K
1
/
8
N
D
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
Iris mode switch
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
MODE
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
POWE
VTR
ON
F
ZEBRA PATTERN DISPLAY DURING MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
By setting the switch to ON, oblique stripes (zebra pattern) can
be imposed on the viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance
levels in accordance with the menu settings made for the video
signal.
The zebra pattern can be used as a reference for manual iris
adjustment.
WHT.BAL switch
OFF ZEBRA
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
ACCU
● The initial setting is 70 to 80%. However, using the ZEBRA
setting on the LCD/VF (1/2) menu screen, zebra patterns
can be displayed in the sections with a luminance level of 85
to 95%, over 95% and over 100%.
FOCUS
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
☞ See “LCD/VF Menu Screen” on page 81.
ZEBRA switch
88
89
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12-4 Shooting the Screen Image on a Computer Monitor
12-3 Adjusting the Shutter Speed
Adjust the shutter speed to obtain special effects or when shooting scenes with slow-moving subjects.
ⅢOutline
The following operation allows the alignment of the shutter
speed of the camera with the variable scanning rate of a
computer monitor or display.
When a computer monitor screen or display is shot with the
camera, a bright horizontal line indicating excessive exposure
is displayed in cases when the scanning rate of the monitor
is faster than the shutter speed of the camera. A dark
horizontal line indicating insufficient exposure is displayed in
cases when the monitor’s scanning rate is slower than the
camera’s shutter speed.
Setting
■ Set the SHUTTER item on the CAMERA OPERATION
menu screen.
Band
OPEN
STEP
: The shutter speed is changed in fixed steps.
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
1
2
5600K
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
/
VARIABLE: The shutter speed is changed with variable scan.
This setting is used for shooting the screen
image on a computer monitor, etc.
SHUTTER
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
Video monitor
CH-1
CH-2
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
Operation
The scanning frequency of a monitor varies due to various
reasons during the computer operation. Adjust the scanning
rate to obtain a stable image while observing the image in
the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
1. Rotate the SHUTTER dial while the normal screen is shown.
(when menu screens are not displayed).
(If “SHUTTER OFF” is displayed, press the SHUTTER dial.)
● The current shutter speed is shown on the LCD monitor
or in the viewfinder for approximately 3 seconds.
STA
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
SHUTTER
MENU
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
/
SHUT-
TER
dial
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
Ⅲ Variable Scan [V.SCAN]
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
•
Basic operation
2. Rotate the SHUTTER dial while the shutter speed is shown.
Rotating the dial downward makes the shutter slower, and
rotating it upward makes it faster.
Set the SHUTTER item on the CAMERAOPERATION menu
screen to VARIABLE. Then rotate the SHUTTER dial upward
or downward to change the shutter speed.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
(The speed is displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.)
3. Stop rotating the SHUTTER dial when the desired shutter
speed is indicated. The set shutter speed value is displayed
for about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
Setting range
STEP: 1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen
•
Compatible frequencies
SHUTTER dial
––– CAMERA OPERATION –––
The variable scan function is compatible with scanning
frequencies in the following range.
60.1Hz to 2084.6 Hz
SHUTTER
FAW
GAIN L
STEP
NONE
0dB
––– CAMERA OPERATION –––
SHUTTER
FAW
GAIN L
GAIN M
GAIN H
LOLUX GAIN
SMOOTH TRANS
SPOT L/BACK L
ASPECT RATIO
PAGE BACK
VARIABLE
A
0dB
6dB
9dB
30dB
OFF
MIDDLE
4:3
GAIN M
6dB
GAIN H
9dB
30dB
OFF
MIDDLE
4:3
CAUTION:
VARIABLE: 1/60.1 Hz to 1/2084.6 Hz
LOLUX GAIN
SMOOTH TRANS
SPOT L/BACK L
ASPECT RATIO
PAGE BACK
This function is not compatible with slow-speed computer
monitors with a vertical scanning speed of 50 Hz.
■ To return the shutter speed to the initial setting, press
the SHUTTER dial.
Initial setting: OFF (“SHUTTER OFF” is indicated on the
screen.)
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen
SHUTTER 1/1000
Shutter speed indication
SHUTTER OFF
Indication of initial shutter
speed value
90
91
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12-5 Gain (Sensitivity) Adjustment
12-6 Switch Setup According to Illumination and Subject
The gain should be switched when the brightness is insufficient due to poor lighting conditions.
Various switch settings are performed to accommodate the conditions of the illumination and the subject when shooting.
GAIN SWITCHING
SWITCH FUNCTIONS
1AUTO IRIS LEVEL switch
This switch allows the gain to be boosted when the illumination
of the subject is insufficient.
GAIN switch
AUTO IRIS
LEVEL switch
BLACK stretch/black
compress switch
This switch allows the reference value for the auto iris
adjustment to be changed according to the lighting condition.
BACK L : When the subject is in backlit conditions.
Opens the iris wider than the standard setting.
NORMAL: Normal lighting condition.
Switch Position
Factory-Set Gain
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
MODE
L
M
H
0dB
9dB
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
L
MODE
VTR
CAM
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
L
SPOT L : When the subject is under a spotlight.
Closes the iris narrower than the standard setting.
CAM
18dB
■ The level of auto iris can be set in SPOT L/BACK L on the
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen when the AUTO IRIS
switch is set to BACK L or SPOT L. ☞ See page 75.
When the GAIN switch is switched, the newly set gain is
displayed for about 3 seconds on the Status (0, 1, 3) screen in
the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
Set it to L (0 dB) in normal use.
2BLACK stretch/black compress switch
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
■ The gain set for each of the switch positions can be changed
with “GAIN” on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
It is also possible to use theALC function that varies the gain
automatically.
This switch makes the image easier to see by varying the
black gain.
BLACK STRETCH : Boosts the gain of black areas to
improve the reproducibility of black.
A setting at –3dB corresponds to a decreased sensitivity
equivalent to the brightness of a 1/2 filter.
☞ See page 75 for details.
NORMAL
: Normal black gain.
BLACK COMPRESS : Attenuates the gain of black areas to
CAUTION:
make the image sharper.
When gain is set to “ALC”, gain is boosted automatically
as the illumination becomes darker. However, noise will
increase a little because the screen becomes brighter as
theALC (Auto Level Control) function boosts the gain more
than in the case of manual adjustment.
■ The gain transition can be made smoother by selecting
“SMOOTH TRANS” on the CAMERA OPERATION menu
screen.
☞ See page 75.
However, note that the SMOOTH TRANS function is not
available if gain is set to ALC.
FULL AUTO SHOOTING (FAS) FUNCTION
The FAS function provides a wide range of compatibility with
shooting conditions that varies as you move between indoors
and outdoors or between bright and dark locations. It eliminates
the need to change the switch and filter positions every time
you move.
The FAS function provides an integrated control of the ALC
(Automatic Level Control), Auto iris and FAW (Full-time Auto
White balance) functions.
FULL AUTO indicator
FULL AUTO/shooting button
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
GAIN BOOST UNDER LOLUX CONDITION
MODE
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
L
CAM
The LOLUX button is used when the illumination is still
insufficient after compensating with the GAIN switch.
Pressing the LOLUX button again will enter the LOLUX mode.
The gain up value during the LOLUX mode is set in LOLUX
GAIN of the CAMERA OPERATION menu.
“LOLUX ON” is displayed for about 3 seconds on the Status (0,
1, 3) mode screen in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
Pressing the button again cancels the LOLUX mode.
“LOLUX OFF” is displayed for about 3 seconds.
LOLUX on/off button
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
Operation
MODE
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
VTR
POWER
VTR
L
CAM
ON
OFF
1. Simply press the FULLAUTO button to enter the FAS mode,
in which the FULL AUTO indicator lights and “FAS” is
displayed to the right in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
■ When the LOLUX function is in use, the image definition on
the screen will degrade to increase residual images, but this
is not a malfunction.
2. Pressing the FULL AUTO button again cancels the FAS
mode and turns the FULL AUTO indicator off.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
■ Automatic Setting Contents
● If you have been displaying the color bars, the screen is
switched automatically to the camera image.
● The auto iris adjustment mode is entered even if the iris mode
switch of the lens is set to manual.
CAUTION:
● The GAIN switch and WHT.BAL switch settings are defeated
in the FAS mode.
Relationship between gain, iris and shutter
● When the power is turned on while the camera is in the
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the
automatic adjustment of FAS is completed.
0.2 Lx
8 Lx
32 Lx
FULL AUTO SHOOTING
2000 Lx
4200 Lx
1/60
18000 Lx
1/240
● The LOLUX button setting is active even in the FAS mode.
However, theALC and EEI are defeated in the LOLUX mode,
in which only the auto iris adjustment and FAW are used.
36 dB
12dB
ALC
0 dB
● All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the
FAS mode is cancelled.
LOLUX
AUTOMATIC IRIS
EEI
● The SMOOTH TRANS function is defeated during switch to
the FAS function.
F1.4
F11
F16
92
93
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION
12-7 How to Use Skin Detail
The contour emphasis in the skin color areas of the video signal can be controlled and made to appear gentle and smooth.
■
Using the Skin Detail Function
■
Setting the Color and Range of the Skin Detail
Function
To use the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLORADJUST
screen, select “ON” for the SKIN DTL DETECT item on the
CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.
FAS
6dB
FAW
I
SD
B
12.2V
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
3200K
5600K 1/8 ND
1
2
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
1. Press the STATUS button for about 1 second to display the
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
NORMAL
COMPRESS
CH-1
CH-2
TOP MENU screen.
L
AUTO
While the Skin Detail function operates, the “SD” indicator is
displayed on the Status 0 and Status 1 screen in the viewfinder
or LCD monitor.
CAM
MANUAL
“SD”
display
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (
)
01/02/03 01:23:45
with the CAMERA PROCESS item. Then press the
SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow to display the
CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.
Status 0
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1. STATUS button
SHUTTER
7. 8. SHUTTER dial
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (
)
with the ADVANCED PROCESS item. Then press the
SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow to display the
ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.
MENU
4. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (
)
with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST item. Then press the
SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow to display the
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen.
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
■
Confirming the color tone area adjusted
with the Skin Detail function
Cursor
● When the ASPECT RATIO is set to SQUEEZE setting,
the screen ratio changes to 4:3.
● The frame shown on the screen indicates the detection
area of the skin detail function.
When the ZEBRA switch on the front section is pressed to the
“SKINAREA” side, Skin Detail function turns on, zebra patterns
are indicated in the colour tone areas adjusted with Skin Detail
and displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.
CANCEL
5. When the cursor ( ) is aligned with the SKIN COLOR DET.
item, the SHUTTER dial is pressed in the direction of the
arrow and EXECUTE selected, the skin color detection
mode is activated.
TOP MENU screen
––– CAMERA PROCESS –––
MASTER BLACK
DETAIL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
MIDDLE
ON
NORMAL
108%
MEMO:
DTL.V/H BALANCE
DTL.FREQUENCY
SKIN DTL.DETECT
V.RESOLUTION
WHITE CLIP
6. Shoot so that the area with the color that you want to detect
is brought within the detection area frame. To decide on the
color for the detection, press the SHUTTER dial to set SKIN
COLOR DET. to STOP.
OFF ZEBRA
When the ASPECT RATIO item on the CAMERA
OPERATION menu is set to SQUEEZE setting, zebra
patterns are not displayed.
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
ON
WHITE
ACCU
FOCUS
VTR
AUDIO
KNEE POINT
100%
LEVELE CH-1
5
ADVANCED PROCESS..
PAGE BACK
● The color is recognized as a color that the skin detail
function works with.
CAMERA PROCESS menu screen
––– ADVANCED PROCESS –––
● The areas recognized by the skin detail function appear
with superimposed zebra patterns.
CINE MODE
COLOR MATRIX
GAMMA
FLARE<MASTER>
FLARE<R>
OFF
STD
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ZEBRA switch
● If the color is not recognized as a color that the skin detail
function works with, “ERROR” is displayed on the screen.
FLARE<B>
SKIN COLOR ADJUST..
PAGE BACK
7. If you want to change the color range recognized by the
skin detail function, perform the following operations.
Set the SKIN COLOR DET. item to EXECUTE.
1
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor ( ) with SKIN
COLOR RANGE, and then press the SHUTTER dial in
the direction of the arrow.
ADVANCED PROCESS screen
––– SKIN COLOR ADJUST –––
a
The area with the setting value starts blinking, and
the value can now be changed.
Detection
area
ERROR
2
3
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow
the colour range.
● Adjust the range while observing the zebra patterns.
To decide the colour range, press the SHUTTER dial in
the direction of the arrow.
SKIN COLOR DET.
SKIN COLOR RANGE NORMAL
PAGE BACK
EXECUTE
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen
a
The setting value stops blinking but remains lit.
8. To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST operation, align the
cursor ( ) with PAGE BACK and press the SHUTTER dial
in the direction of the arrow.
● If the ASPECT RATIO is set to SQUEEZE, the screen
returns to SQUEEZE display.
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen
94
95
13. OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13-1 Alarm Indications and Actions
The GY-DV5100 displays messages on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder in the case of improper operation, notices on
remaining battery power and tape and warnings in the case of abnormalities during VCR operation.
Also, when remaining tape or battery power becomes small, or in the case of abnormalities during VCR operation, theTALLY lamps and
viewfinder lamp will blink (or light steadily), and alarm sound will be output through the monitoring loudspeaker or the PHONES jack.
B: Alarm display area
● Warning Indications for VCR Abnormalities
Should malfunctions occur during VCR operation, the unit self-diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose together with an
error code on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
Error code
∗1 If the unit is used in a state where the cassette cover is
open after inserting a cassette tape, there can be a
case where an error code “3200, 7202, 7302” appears.
In such a case, switch off the power once and switch it
on again, and then close the cassette cover before use.
TALLY lamp
WARNING7001
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
Warning
LOW VOLTAGE
NO TAPE
FAS
dB
FAW
I
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
B
FILTER
3200K
1
2
1
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
1
12.2V
/
SHUTTER
01/02/03 01:23:45
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
Error Code
Error Details
GY-DV5100 Operation
Remedy
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
A:Improper operation
caution area
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
VTR
CH-1
CH-2
L
AUTO
CAM
MANUAL
0201
Indicates dew formation Operation stops. All operations Leave the unit with the power ON,
TALLY lamp
CONDENSATION ON DRUM (condensation)
are rejected.
until the indication disappears.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
(Alarm sound)
3200
Tape cannot be loaded.
Switch the power OFF and then
switch it back ON. However, the
tape may be damaged depending
on the circumstances. Please con-
sult the person in charge of pro-
fessional video equipment at your
nearest JVC-authorized service
agent.
PHONES jack
LOADING FAILURE
∗1
3300
Tape cannot be unloaded.
Monitoring loudspeaker (alarm sound)
UNLOADING FAILURE
■ Screen indications on the LCD monitor and in the Viewfinder
● Improper operation caution area (Display area: A)
4100
Irregularity with eject oper-
CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE ation.
Indication
Condition
Remedy
standard DV videocassette or MiniDV
TAPE DEFECTIVE
5605 ~ 5609
Tape is cut.
Operation stops.
Press the EJECT button to take
out the cassette.
INVALID TAPE!
A data tape for PC or DVCPRO videocassette Use
use is used. The tape is forcibly ejected.
a
videocassette for video use.
5702
Tape end sensor error.
Operation stops. All operations Switch the power OFF and then
LP TAPE INVALID! Attempt to play back a tape recorded in the LP mode. The GY-DV5100 cannot play back tapes recorded in the LPmode.
TAPE END DET. ERROR
are rejected.
switch it back ON. However, the
tape may be damaged depending
on the circumstances. Please con-
sult the person in charge of pro-
fessional video equipment at your
nearest JVC-authorized service
agent.
NO DV SIGNAL
COPY INHIBIT
REC INHIBIT
DV signal is not input.
Input a DV signal.
5802
Tape beginning sensor er-
TAPE BEGIN DET. ERROR ror.
Attempt to record a copy-guarded DV signal.
A copy-guarded DV signal cannot be input.
7001
Drum rotation error.
An unrecordable videocassette (the switch on the Set the switch on the back of the cassette to “REC”.
back of the cassette is set to “SAVE”) is loaded.
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
7101
Capstan rotation error.
NO TAPE
No videocassette is loaded.
Insert a videocassette.
CAP MOTOR FAILURE
7202 ~ 7203
SUPPLY REEL FAILURE
Supply reel rotation error.
● Alarm area (Display area: B)
∗1
Indication
Condition
Remaining battery power is low.
Remedy
Prepare a charged battery or replace the battery immediately.
7302 ~ 7303
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE
Take up reel rotation error.
LOW VOLTAGE
∗1
TAPE NEAR END The remaining tape is 3 minutes or less. (Only To continue the recording, prepare a new tape or replace
displayed in the shooting mode.)
with a new tape immediately.
7305
Irregular tape winding
when unloading.
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE
HEAD CLEANING Displayed in case of video head clogging. (Head Clean the head with the special head cleaning tape. (See
7401
Reel motor rotation error.
REQUIRED!
clogging is detected and indicated during edit page 7.)
search in the recording mode and during playback.)
REEL MOTOR FAILURE
TURN POWER OFF.
TURN BACK ON LATER.
System error when power MODE indicator and TALLY Turn off the power and let the unit
is turned on.
lamp flash. Only Power switch sit for sometime before turning it
operation is accepted.
back on.
COPY GUARD!
Attempt to play back a copy-guarded tape.
A copy-guarded tape cannot be played back.
CLOSE CASSETTE The cassette cover is open.
COVER!
Close the cassette cover.
■ TALLY lamp
Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low. (Only in Camera mode)
OPEN CASSETTE
COVER!
The cassette cover is closed.
Open the cassette cover.
If a cassette tape cannot be ejected automatically, press
the EJECT button.
Blinking Pattern
Remaining Battery/Tape
● Remaining battery power is low.
Slow blinking
(once per sec.)
● Remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.
MEMO:
Fast blinking
(four times per sec.)
● Tape has run out.
● Irregularity has occurred in the VCR.
The GY-DV5100 is a microcomputer-controlled piece of equipment, which may malfunction due to external noise or interference.
In this case, turn the power OFF, and then turn it ON again.
96
97
13. OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13-1 Alarm Indications and Actions (Cont’d)
13-2 Troubleshooting
■ Viewfinder Warning Lamps
Symptoms
Remedy
● Is power supply connected correctly?
1. BATTERY lamp
Power cannot be switched ON.
This red lamp lights red under the following circumstances.
● Is battery pack recharged?
Lights red : When the battery voltage becomes too low for
the camera to operate.
● Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF?
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been
turned OFF.
2. REC/ALARM lamp
This lamp lights or blinks green under the following
conditions.
REC
Recording is not possible.
● Is the switch on cassette set to “REC”? If it is set to “SAVE”, set it to “REC”.
● The Camera mode has not been selected. (The CAM indicator does not light.)
While the VTR indicator lights, press the MODE switch upward to turn on the
CAM indicator.
1.
2.
BATT
ALARM
Battery lamp
REC/ALARM lamp
Lights Green
Blinks Green
:
:
● While recording
● During the interval where the unit
switches from record-standby to record
mode.
Camera image does not appear on LCD ● The Camera mode has not been selected. (The CAM indicator does not light.)
● Immediately before the tape runs out or
has run out.
monitor or in viewfinder.
While the VTR indicator lights, camera image will not be output. Press the
MODE switch upward to turn on the CAM indicator.
● If the VCR malfunctions.
Image shown on LCD monitor or in
viewfinder is dark or blurred.
● Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.
● Is the color temperature conversion filter knob set to 5600K+ND?
● Is the iris closed?
● Is the shutter speed too fast?
● Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected?
■ Alarm Sound
Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the
volume level are selected with the ALARMVR LEVEL item
on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen.
When remaining battery power becomes low, a warning
sound is output from the monitoring loudspeaker and the
PHONES jack. (In Camera mode only)
When an irregularity occurs in the VCR, a warning sound is
also output.
Playback does not start when the play
button is pressed.
● In the Camera mode, is “STOP” indicated as the VTR operation mode indicator?
When “STBY” is indicated, press the STOP button to display “STOP”.
■ Depending on the alarm conditions, the warning indicators on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen, theTALLY lamp, the viewfinder
lamp, and alarm sounds appear as shown in the following table.
DV signal cannot be input.
● The VTR mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)
While the CAM indicator lights, press the MODE switch upward to turn on the
VTR indicator.
Alarm Indications
on LCD Monitor/
Viewfinder Screen
Lamp Viewfinder Lamp
Alarm BATT
TALLY
Lamp
Noise interferes with playback video.
Sound is not output during playback.
● Video head may be clogged with dirt. Clean head with the special head cleaning
tape. (☞ See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 7.)
Alarm Sound
Condition
● Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen set to CH3/4.
To output the sound of the recording, set to CH1/2.
Dew formation (condensation) or error
has occurred in the VCR.
VTR alarm indication
(Example)
0701
Noise appears when playing back a tape ● When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording, this
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
recorded on another unit.
phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors.
About 3 min. before tape end
(displayed during recording).
TAPE NEAR END
The transient section between scenes
recorded on other units and those
recorded on the GY-DV5100 may appear
disturbed.
Tape end
(displayed during recording).
LOW VOLTAGE
Remaining battery power is low.
:Blinking four times per second.
The front section’s audio level control
doesn’t work.
● Is the CH1 FRONT VR item on the AUDIO/VIDEO menu screen set to
“DISABLE”? If so, set to “ENABLE”.
Display symbols
:Steady lighting
Sound interrupted once per second.
:Blinking once per second.
:Continuous sound.
The front section’s audio level control
doesn’t change the audio level of the
sound input to CH-2.
● The front section’s audio level control cannot be used to change the audio level
of the sound input to CH-2. Use the side section’s CH-2 audio level control for
this purpose.
:
Remaining battery power display is
incorrect.
● The OTHERS (2/2) menu screen’s BATTERY TYPE item may not be set
correctly in accordance with the type of battery in use. If the menu item setting is
incorrect, set it correctly using the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen’s item BATTERY
TYPE.
Battery alarm is displayed and the GY-
DV5100 enters the non-operating mode
even when a fully charged battery is used.
● Is the battery old?
Cassette cannot be ejected after the
power is turned ON.
● The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient. Check the power voltage.
Time code or user’s bits data not
displayed.
● Is the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF menu screen set to OFF? If so, set to ON.
The date and time are not displayed or
recorded.
● Is the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu screen set to OFF? Set to ON
when the data should be displayed and recorded.
To record the data, set the DATE REC item as well.
● Is the date and time setting made?
☞ See “Setting, Displaying and Recording the Date and Time” on page 43-45.
98
99
13. OTHERS
13-3 Hour Meter Display
The GY-DV5100 can display the accumulated running time of the head drum in the HOUR METER item on the OTHERS (2/2)
menu screen. Use this as a guide for periodical maintenance. ☞ See page 7.
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.
2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to display
the TOP MENU screen.
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
FILTER
1
2
3200K
5600K
1
1
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
/
SHUTTER
MENU
L
C
D
B
R
I
G
H
T
DISPLAY
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select the OTHERS item, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
● The OTHERS (1/2) menu screen appears.
POWER
VTR
ON
OFF
4. Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu
screen, and then press the SHUTTER dial.
● The OTHERS (2/2) menu screen appears.
SHUTTER dial
STATUS button
■ The accumulated drum running time is shown next to the
DRUM HOUR item on the OTHERS (2/2) menu screen.
5. To return to the normal screen, use either of the following
TOP MENU menu screen
methods.
––– MENU –––
CAMERA OPERATION..
CAMERA PROCESS..
AUDIO/VIDEO..
LCD/VF..
TC/UB/CLOCK..
OTHERS..
FILE MANAGE..
● Press the STATUS button
or
● Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the EXIT
item from the TOP MENU screen before pressing the
SHUTTER dial.
MENU ALL RESET
EXIT
CANCEL
OTHERS (2/2) menu screen
––– OTHERS(2/2) –––
ALARM VR LEVEL
BATTERY TYPE
FRONT TALLY
BACK TALLY
HIGH
12V
BLINK
OFF
PAGE BACK
DRUM HOUR
00200
Accumulated drum running time
100
E
U
13. OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13-4 Specifications
13-4 Specifications
■ CAMERA SECTION
■ INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
■ CAMERA SECTION
■ INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
Image pickup devices: 1/2-inch interline CCD × 3
Color separation optical system:
F1.4 3-color separation prism
Video signal output : 1 V (p-p), 75 ohms (BNC)
Image pickup devices: 1/2-inch interline CCD × 3
Colour separation optical system:
F1.4 3-colour separation prism
Video signal output : 1 V (p-p), 75 ohms (BNC) unbal-
unbalanced composite output.
anced composite output.
YC output
: Y 1 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance
YC output
: Y 1 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance
C 0.3 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance
(4-pin)
Number of effective pixels:
C 0.286 V (p-p) 75 ohms
unbalance (4-pin)
Number of effective pixels:
380,000 pixels ((H) 768 × (V) 494)
440,000 pixels ((H) 752 × (V) 582)
Color system
: NTSC (wide-band R-Y, B-Y
encoder)
: Compliance with SMPTE color bar
: Internal sync (built-in SSG)
: Bayonet system (compatible with
1/2” lens)
Lens
Audio input
: 12-pin connector
: Microphone –60 dBs, 3 kohm
(phantom power
Colour system
: PAL (wide-band R-Y, B-Y
encoder)
: Compliance with EBU colour bar
: Internal sync (built-in SSG)
: Bayonet system (compatible with
1/2" lens)
Lens
Audio input
: 12-pin connector
: Microphone –60 dBs, 3 kohm
(phantom power
Color bars
Sync system
Lens mount
Colour bars
Sync system
Lens mount
+48V output
supported) (XLR-3)
+48V output
supported) (XLR-3)
Line
4 dBs, 10 kohm
Line
4 dBs, 10 kohm
Optical filter
: 3200 K, 5600 K, 5600K + 1/8ND,
5600K + 1/64ND
balanced (XLR-3)
: –8 dBs, low impedance,
unbalanced
: –60 to –17 dBs, at 8-ohm load
(stereo sound mini-jack)
: 12V DC (11 to 15 V DC) (XLR-4)
Optical filter
: 3200 K, 5600 K, 5600K + 1/8ND,
5600K + 1/64ND
balanced (XLR-3)
: –8 dBs, low impedance,
unbalanced
: –60 to –17 dBs, at 8-ohm load
(stereo sound mini-jack)
: 12V DC (11 to 15 V DC) (XLR-4)
Audio output
Earphone output
DC input
Audio output
Earphone output
DC input
Minimum illumination: 0.2 lx (F1.4, LOLUX Max mode)
Gain
Minimum illumination: 0.2 lx (F1.4, LOLUX Max mode)
Gain
: –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 dB, ALC,
LOLUX,
: 1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000
: –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 dB, ALC,
LOLUX,
: 1/6.25, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000
Shutter speed
Shutter speed
Auxiliary power output: 12 V DC, max. 0.1 A (11 to 15 V
Auxiliary power output: 12 V DC, max. 0.1 A (11 to 15 V
DC 4-pin)
DC 4-pin)
V.SCAN speed
Registration
: 60.1 Hz to 2084.6 Hz
: 0.05% or less (excluding lens
distortion)
DV connector
: 4-pin
V.SCAN speed
Registration
: 50.1 Hz to 2067.8 Hz
: 0.05% or less (excluding lens
distortion)
DV connector
: 4-pin
■ GENERAL
■ GENERAL
Contour correction : Horizontal: dual-edged.
Contour correction : Horizontal: dual-edged. Vertical:
Power consumption : 24 W (with VF-P115B, standard
Power consumption : 1.6 A (with VF-P115B, standard
Vertical: 2 H
2 H
lens) at the time of recording
lens) at the time of recording
Mass
: 3.5 kg (main unit only)
Mass
: 3.5 kg (main unit only)
Approx. 5.6 kg (with lens (S14 ×
7.3B12U), viewfinder (VF-P115B),
battery (NP-1B), microphone
(Provided), videocassette
(M-DV30))
■ VTR SECTION
■ VTR SECTION
Approx. 5.6 kg (with lens (S14 ×
7.3B12U), viewfinder (VF-P115B),
battery (DIONIC 90), microphone
(Provided), videocassette
(M-DV30))
Format
Tape speed
: DV (SP mode only)
: 18.812 mm/sec
(DV SP recording playback)
28.218 mm/sec
(DV CAM playback)
: 276 minutes
(With LA-DV276PRO cassette)
60 minutes
Format
Tape speed
: DV (SP mode only)
: 18.831 mm/sec (DV SP recording
playback)
: 276 minutes (With LA-DV276PRO
cassette)
60 minutes (With M-DV60ME
cassette)
: Approx. 3 minutes
Record/Play time
F.F/Rewind time
Operating temperatures : 0 °C to 40 °C
Operating humidity : 30 % to 80 % RH
Storage temperatures: –20 °C to 60 °C
Operating temperatures : 0 °C to 40 °C
Operating humidity : 30 % to 80 % RH
Storage temperatures: –20 °C to 60 °C
Record/Play time
F.F/Rewind time
Storage humidity
: 85% RH
Storage humidity
: 85 % RH
(With M-DV60ME cassette)
: Approx. 3 minutes
(With LA-DV276PRO cassette)
(With LA-DV276PRO cassette)
[VIDEO]
Recording format
■ ACCESSORIES
■ ACCESSORIES
: 8-bit, 13.5 MHz, 4:2:0 component
recording
Microphone
Tripod base
Hexagon wrench
Instruction Manual
: × 1 (SCV2987-004)*
: × 1 (SCV3021-001)*
: × 1 (LW40409-001A)*
: × 1
Microphone
Tripod base
Hexagon wrench
Instruction Manual
Instruction Manual
: × 1 (SCV2987-004)*
: × 1 (SCV3021-001)*
: × 1 (LW40409-001A)*
: × 1 (GY-DV5100)
[VIDEO]
Recording format
: 8-bit, 13.5 MHz,
4:1:1 component recording
[AUDIO]
Recording format
: 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel PCM
audio/12-bit, 32 kHz 4-channel
PCM audio (2 channels for
recording)
[AUDIO]
Recording format
: × 2 (GY-DV5101)
: 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel PCM
audio/12-bit, 32 kHz 4-channel
PCM audio (2 channels for
recording)
*
Service parts number
For details, consult your JVC dealer.
*
Service parts number
For details, consult your JVC dealer.
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz (in 48 kHz mode)
Wow & flutter
: Below measurable limit
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz (in 48 kHz mode)
[Time Code System]
Time code signal
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Wow & flutter
: Below measurable limit
: Compliance with EBU standard
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
[Time Code System]
Time code signal
: Compliance with SMPTE
standard
101
E-101
E
U
13. OTHERS
13. OTHERS
13-4 Specifications (Cont’d)
13-4 Specifications (Cont’d)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Viewfinder
: VF-P115B, VF-P116
Viewfinder
: VF-P115B, VF-P116
Power zoom lens
: S14 × 7.3B12U, S17 × 6.6BRM, S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)
YH16 × 7K12U, YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)
: AA-P250
: MV-P615U, MV-P618U
: KA-A50U
Power zoom lens
: S14 × 7.3B12U, S17 × 6.6BRM, S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)
YH16 × 7K12U, YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)
: AA-P250
: MV-P615U, MV-P618U
: KA-A50U
: SCV2978-002
AC power adapter
Microphone
Microphone holder
Battery case
AC power adapter
Microphone
Microphone holder
Battery case
: SCV2978-002
Anton-Bauer
Anton-Bauer battery holder
: QR JVC DIGI
battery holder
: QR JVC DIGI
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (unit: mm)
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (unit: mm)
OPEN
EDITSEARCH
MONITOR
VF
OPEN
FILTER
1
2
3200K
1
EDITSEARCH
5600K
/
8
ND
64 ND
STATUS
MONITOR
.3 5600K
.4 5600K
VF
1
/
FILTER
3200K
5600K 1/8 ND
1
2
SHUTTER
.3 5600K
.4 5600K 1/64 ND
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
MENU
STATUS
SHUTTER
MENU
AUDIO
LEVEL
PULL
OPEN
FRONT
REAR
LCD BRIGHT
DISPLAY
AUTO IRIS
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
BACK
NORMAL
SPOT
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL
VTR
PULL
CH-1
OPEN
L
CAM
MANUAL
FRONT
REAR
AUTO IRIS
BACK
FULL AUTO
BLACK
LOLUX
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
CH-2
MODE
AUDIO IN
L
STRETCH
NORMAL
COMPRESS
AUDIO SELECT
CH-2
AUTO
VTR
NORMAL
SPOT
CH-1
L
CAM
MANUAL
OFF ZEBRA
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
WHITE
ON
POWER
VTR
ACCU
FOCUS
ON
OFF
OFF ZEBRA
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
SKIN
AREA
AUTO
ON
WHITE
POWER
VTR
ACCU
FOCUS
ON
OFF
VTR
AUDIO
LEVELE CH-1
5
120.5
359
363.5
120.5
359
* Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
* Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
102
E-102
E
U
® is a registered trademark owned by Victor Company of Japan, Limited
® is a registered trademark in Japan, the U.S.A., the U.K. and many other countries.
© 2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
® is a registered trademark owned by Victor Company of Japan, Limited.
Printed in Japan
LWT0230-001A
® is a registered trademark in Japan, the U.S.A., the U.K. and many other countries.
© 2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Printed in Japan
LWT0231-001A
|
Pioneer Car Satellite TV System DEH 7300BT User Manual
Philips BDP7500SL User Manual
Panasonic AK HC1800G User Manual
Onkyo Blu ray Player DV BD606 User Manual
Magnavox 3139 125 39291 User Manual
Legacy Car Audio LA 1889 User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio VCT 2310 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System KDC BT755HD User Manual
JVC XMD100 User Manual
JVC MARINE CASE GR DVX10 User Manual